f 

f     -HOME- 


BOYSANoGIRLS 


BERTHA  JOHNSTON 


HOME  OCCUPATIONS 

FOR 

BOYS  AND  GIRLS 


BERTHA  JOHNSTON 

KDITOR  OF  THE  "  KINDERGARTEN  MAGAZINE  ' 


ASSISTED  BY 

FANNY  CHAPIN 

PEN  DIRECTOR  OF  THB  CHICAGO  LATIN  SCHOOL 


PHILADELPHIA 

GEORGE  W.  JACOBS  &  CO. 
PUBLISHERS 


COPYRIGHT,  1908 

By  GEORGE  W.  JACOBS  &  CO. 
PUBLISHED  OCTOBER,  1908 


All  rights  reserved 
Printed  in  U.S.A. 


Teach  him.  He  is  naturally  clever.  From 
his  earliest  years,  when  he  was  a  little  fellow 
only  so  big,  he  would  build  mud  houses,  carve 
out  boats,  and  make  little  wagons  of  leather, 
and  frogs  out  of  pomegranate  rinds,  you  can 't 
think  how  cleverly. 

Aristophanes,  421  B.  C. 


2O66023 


PREFACE 

The  plan  of  this  book  has  special  reference  to  the 
.Mother  when  comes  the  woful  plaint,  "I  don't  know 
what  to  do  !  Mama,  what  can  I  do  now  ?" 

Is  she  busy  in  the  kitchen?  She  has  right  there 
material  for  the  little  one's  happy  employment.  Is  she 
mending  the  stockings  ?  She  can  give  him  needle  and 
thread  and,  with  the  aid  of  this  book,  a  word  of  sug- 
gestion. In  spare  moments  both  mother  and  children 
can  together  prepare  papers,  cards,  etc.,  for  future 
occasions. 

It  will  be  found  upon  examination  that  although 
some  of  the  articles  described  herein  require  material 
peculiar  to  certain  localities,  very  many  more  may  be 
made  of  things  to  be  found  in  every  home,  whether 
the  city  flat  or  the  remote  country  homestead.  Usu- 
ally a  choice  is  possible.  One  may  use  the  cardboard, 
paper,  etc.,  saved  from  the  scrap-basket  or  may  send 
to  supply  houses  for  material  partially  prepared.  It 
is  an  undoubted  advantage  for  the  child  to  be  trained 
to  see  the  possibilities  in  the  raw  material  lying  at 
hand.  It  stimulates  his  inventive  imagination  and 
makes  for  efficiency  and  the  power  to  cope  with 
emergencies. 

The  child  accustomed  to  looking  upon  odds  and 
ends  of  wire,  paper,  weeds,  seeds,  and  grasses  as 
hiding  delightful  secrets  which  he  may  learn  to  un- 
ravel and  utilize,  may  be  readily  trained  to  regard 
all  Nature  as  a  vast  storehouse  open  to  his  investiga- 
tion, and  a  continual  source  of  inspiration. 

The  child,  habituated  to  mastering  the  raw  ma- 
terial of  his  immediate  environment,  will  not  be  dis- 
comfited if  thrown  upon  an  unknown  shore,  whether 
arctic  or  tropical.  He  will  recognize  everywhere 
5 


6  Preface 

about  him  possibilities  for  shelter,  food,  clothing,  and 
transportation  and  will  know  how-to  use  them. 

But  the  child  must  be  trained  to  perceive  the 
beautiful  and  the  ideal  as  well  as  the  useful.  Into 
each  article  here  described,  even  the  simplest,  enter 
the  elements  of  beauty,  proportion,  harmony  of  line 
and  color,  and  good,  true  workmanship,  leading  surely, 
even  if  unconsciously,  to  an  appreciation  of  the  best 
wherever  found. 

In  making  an  article  as  a  gift  for  child  or  adult, 
thought  for  others  is  cultivated  and  the  frequently 
needed  help  of  older  brother  or  sister  encourages  the 
spirit  of  goodwill  and  kindliness. 

The  festival  occasions  are  especially  valuable  in 
developing  the  sense  of  interdependence  and  large- 
mindedness. 

Among  a  people  proverbially  wasteful  it  is  cer- 
tainly the  part  of  wisdom  to  train  the  child  to  economy 
for  the  sake  of  future  service.  The  contents  of  the 
city  garbage  barrel  are  found  by  business  men  to  be 
worth  sorting  and  classifying  and  everything  proves 
to  be  of  some  use.  Why  should  not  the  child  be 
taught,  before  throwing  away  the  discarded  picture 
book,  to  ask  if  there  is  not  a  use  for  it  still  ?  A  nation 
so  trained  will  preserve  its  forests  and  save  its 
Niagaras.  It  will  see  things  material  and  things 
spiritual  in  their  true  relations. 

We  would  suggest  that  a  little  cupboard  be  placed 
within  easy  reach  of  the  child.  Here  he  may  keep 
his  own  scissors,  paste,  pencil  and  papers,  ready 
for  use  when  the  propitious  moment  of  inspiration 
seizes  him. 

Too  much  exactness  must  not  be  required  of  the 
very  young  child,  but  as  fast  as  he  is  able  to  do  good 
work  insist  upon  the  best  of  which  he  is  capable. 


Preface  7 

Train  him  always  to  try  to  surpass  himself.  Above 
all,  let  him  be  happy  in  the  doing. 

The  ideas  offered  in  this  volume  have  been  gar- 
nered from  various  sources.  Practical  experience  in 
the  home  has  suggested  many,  and  actual  daily  work 
in  the  kindergarten  has  given  rise  to  others.  A  few, 
such  as  the  thimble  biscuit  party  and  croquet  with 
peas,  are  among  the  recollections  of  happy  childhood. 

It  is  a  pleasure  to  acknowledge  the  obligation  to 
Miss  Fanny  Chapin,  of  Chicago,  a  kindergartner  of 
long  experience,  for  the  comradeship  of  thought  which 
made  the  book  possible.  Miss  Chapin  also  con- 
tributed the  directions  for  making  feather  flowers, 
many  of  the  holiday  suggestions,  and  other  items  scat- 
tered through  the  book. 

The  conversion  of  corks  into  a  set  of  furniture 
was  learned  from  a  German  playmate  twenty-five 
years  ago.  Imagine  the  interest  with  which  we  dis- 
covered a  set,  almost  identical,  at  the  German  exhibit 
of  the  recent  International  Kindergarten  Union. 

The  candlesticks  of  tin  or  cardboard,  brightened 
with  colored  tissue-paper,  varied  to  suit  particular 
occasions,  is  a  regular  feature  of  the  festival  dinners 
at  the  Gertrude  House,  Chicago. 

To  one  and  all  to  whom,  consciously  or  uncon- 
sciously, we  may  be  indebted  for  any  suggestions,  we 
express  our  thanks. 

A  perusal  of  this  little  volume  will  show  that  it  is 
far  from  exhaustive  of  the  topics  treated.  It  is  largely 
a  book  of  suggestion.  If  it  stimulates  the  child  to 
new  investigations  and  experiments  along  similar 
lines ;  if  it  reinforces  the  spirit  of  brotherly  kindness 
in  the  home;  or  if  it  helps  to  solve  any  of  the 
problems  of  the  mother,  the  hopes  of  the  authors  will 
be  accomplished.  BERTHA  JOHNSTON. 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.     The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket n 

II.     Mother  Nature's  Horn  of  Plenty 39 

III.  Saved  from  the  Scrap  Basket 53 

IV.  The  Sewing-Basket 69 

V.     The  Paint  Box 73 

VI.     Dolls  and  Doll-Houses 80 

VII.     Plays  and  Games 92 

'VIII.     Festival  Occasions 107 

IX.     The  Key  Basket 141 

X.     The  Child's  Library 149 

XL  Kindergarten  Materials — The  Gifts....  155 

XII.  "                     "     — The  Occupations .  164 


CHAPTER    I 

THE  SECRETS  OF  THE  MARKET  BASKET 

The  busy  but  thoughtful  mother  will  find  in  the 
contents  of  the  market  basket  many  possibilities  for 
happily  employing  the  creative  instinct  of  her  child. 
We  give  a  few  suggestions  which  demand  activity  of 
both  mind  and  body. 

STRAWBERRY-BOXES 

Seed-Markers  (No  tools  needed  but  the  fingers) 

Remove  the  rim  of  wood  which  binds  the  box 
into  shape,  that  the  little  tacks  may  not  injure  the 
child.  Then  let  him  tear  the  sides  and  bottom  into 
little  slats  which  can  be  used  as  seed-markers.  Older 
children  can  write  upon  them  the  names  of  seeds,  and 
when  planted  put  one  of  these  slats  into  the  ground 
to  indicate  where  the  seeds  may  be  expected  to 
come  up. 

The  little  child  enjoys  the  sense  of  power  that  he 
feels  simply  in  being  able  to  tear  these  boxes  apart, 
but  let  the're  be  a  thought  back  of  the  action  if  it 
seem  to  degenerate  into  pure  destructiveness. 

Toy-Fences  (Employing  fingers  only) 

Split  the  boxes  with  the  fingers  into  pieces  wide 

or  narrow,  as  desired,  and  the  slats  thus  made  can  be 

turned  into  fences  for  the  play  farm  in  the  sand-box, 

or  for  borders  for  small  flower  beds.     ( i )  Stick  them 

11 


12   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

into  the  sand  or  earth  side  by  side,  to  suggest  a  plain 
board  fence;  or  (2)  Put  very  narrow  ones  at  short 
intervals  apart  to  suggest  a  picket  fence. 

Toy-Fences  (Scissors,  tacks) 

If  old  enough  to  use  scissors,  let  the  child  cut  the 
boxes  apart  with  long  scissors  and  use  for  fences  as 
before,  (i)  Side  by  side  for  board  fence.  (2)  Cut 
into  very  narrow  strips  for  picket  fence.  Use  the  rim 
of  the  basket  for  the  rail  to  unite  the  pickets,  fastening 
them  with  the  tiny  tacks  which  are  already  in  it. 
Pickets  might  be  one  inch  apart.  Cutting  the  tops  of 
the  pickets  into  points  will  complete  the  resemblance  to 
a  real  fence.  Put  the  rails  about  one-half  inch  from 
top. 

Boxes  for  tacks,  seeds,  etc.  (Scissors,  paste,  paste- 
sticks,  ribbon,  &}/2  inches  long,  il/2  inches  wide, 
ivall-paper,  pan  with  zvater) 
Take  two  pieces  of  a  box,  each  measuring  2x5 
inches.     Soak  in  water  till  soft.     Place  one  directly 
across  the  middle  of  the  other,  and  bend  the   four 
projecting   ends   up   perpendicularly   into  box   form. 
(i)  Hold  the  sides  in  place  by  winding  the  ribbon 
around  the  four  sides,  till  they  meet,  and  paste  the  one 
overlapping  end  over  the  other.     (2)  Cut  a  piece  of 
wall-paper    (obtainable    often    from    a    wall-hanger's 
shop)  into  a  strip  il/2  x  %l/2  inches  and  wind  around, 
pasting  one  end  over  the  other.    If  the  child  is  inex- 
perienced the  paper  may  be  cut  of  exactly  the  height 
of  box.     If  skillful  in  so  doing,  let  him  cut  the  strip 
y2  inch  wider  and  turn  down  over  the  top  to  give  a 
little  finish.    This  gives  practice  in  neatness  and  skill. 
Let  the  child  observe  how  a  Swedish  matchbox- 
is  made — the  wood  held  together  by  strips  of  thin  but 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket       13 

tough  paper — and  then  carry  his  thought  to  the  far- 
distant  land  which  sends  us  the  magic  wands  that 
give  us  light  with  safety.  And  all  carried  in  a  tiny 
box  made  of  wood  and  paper.  Decalcomanias  might 
be  used  for  decoration  of  the  plain  wooden  box. 

Let  the  child  experiment  in  making  boxes  of 
different  shapes  and  sizes  for  his  collections  of  seeds, 
stones,  etc.  This  cultivates  his  ingenuity  and  practical 
imagination. 

Picture  Frames   (Scissors,  thumb-tacks,  gold  paint, 

water-colors,  glue) 

Cut  three  slats,  each  I  x  8  inches,  to  make  triangu- 
lar frame.  Unite  with  thumb-tacks,  one  at  each  of  the 
three  corners.  To  place  them  exactly  the  right  way 
may  take  a  little  experimenting,  which  helps  develop 
the  child's  sense  of  proportion  and  arrangement. 
When  joined,  cut  off  the  projecting  parts  at  the  top 
to  give  pointed  effect.  Good  for  pictures  of  Indians, 
as  wigwam  is  suggested.  Decorate  by  gilding  or 
painting.  Can  be  painted  with  Ivory  paints  or  water- 
colors. 

Chicken-Coops  (Scissors,  glue) 

Remove  the  rim,  bottom  (in  one  piece)  and  two 
adjoining  sides  of  a  berry  box.  This  leaves  two  sides 
remaining  which  are  already  bent  into  correct  form 
for  coop.  Cut  the  bottom  of  the  box  in  half  from 
corner  to  corner.  This  gives  the  triangular  back  of 
the  coop  which  must  be  glued  on.  The  slats  must 
now  be  made  and  put  into  place.  Cut  three  slats  each 
Yz  inches  wide,  (i)  In  each  of  the  two  front  edges 
of  the  coop  cut  three  horizontal  slits  ^  inches  deep ; 
slip  the  slats  into  these  and  cut  off  the  projecting  ends. 
The  slats  at  the  top  will  necessarily  be  shorter  than 


14  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

those  at  the  bottom.  (2)  Or  an  older  child  can  cut  in 
each  of  the  two  edges  3  notches  JH$  inches  deep  and 
Ys  inches  high  and  glue  the  slats  into  these,  thus : 


Chicken- Coop. 

Paste-Sticks  (Boxes,  scissors} 

Cut  sides  of  boxes  into  slender  pieces  which  can  be 
put  aside  and  used  for  paste-sticks  when  pasting  is 
the  order  of  the  day.  They  will  prove  to  be  better 
than  brushes. 

Wagon   (Thumb-tacks,  button-molds,  skewers,  glue, 

small,  slender  nails) 

Take  two  boxes.  Remove  rims.  Bend  down  one 
side  of  each  of  the  boxes  so  that  it  is  horizontal.  Lap 
one  of  these  exactly  over  the  other  and  join  with 
thumb-tacks.  This  makes  the  body  of  coal  wagon. 
For  wheels  use  (i)  large  wooden  button-molds  or  (2) 
the  cardboard  circles  round  which  ribbons  come. 
Make  axles  of  skewers.  Glue  axle  to  bottom  of  wag- 
on, slip  on  the  wheels  and  insert  small,  slender  nail 
to  keep  wheel  from  coming  off.  If  skewers  are  not 
at  hand  whittle  a  slender  piece  from  a  stick  of  kindling 
wood,  whittling  the  ends  until  slender  enough  for  the 
wheels  to  slip  on.  Paint  spokes  on  the  wheels  and 
paint  the  wagon,  using  any  paint  at  hand. 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket       15 

Candy-Boxes    [     (Fancy    paper,    crinkled-paper    or 
Button-Boxes  j         silk,  glue,  paint} 

Take  a  berry-box  and  dye  with  Diamond  dyes. 
Line  it  with  crinkled  paper  or  dainty  flowered  wall- 
paper or  silk.  To  do  this,  fold  the  paper  or  silk  one 
inch  over  on  itself  from  the  top,  for  hem.  Gather  or 
pleat  the  silk  near  the  top  with  silk  of  same  color  and 
glue  to  the  inner  side  of  the  basket  near  the  top,  leav- 
ing a  little  projecting  edge  for  ruffle.  Leave  the 
lower  ends  free.  The  silk  should  be  two  inches 
wider  than  the  depth  of  the  basket  and  one  and  one- 
third  times  as  long  as  the  four  sides  of  the  basket. 
Now  take  a  square  of  cardboard  the  size 'of  the  bot- 
tom of  the  basket  and  cover  it  smoothly  with  a  square 
of  silk,  folding  the  silk  neatly  over  the  sides  and  catch- 
ing it  across  so  as  to  be  smooth  on  the  right  side.  Put 
this  silk  square  down  in  the  bottom  of  the  basket  and 
it  will  hold  the  sides  of  the  lining  firm.  A  basket 
may  be  lined  with  paper  in  the  same  way,  using  glue 
to  hold  it  in  place.  As  paper  can  not  very  well  be 
gathered,  the  top  may  be  glued  down  smoothly  or  the 
paper  may  be  pleated. 

Hanging-Basket  (Lead  from  tea-box,  ribbon  or  wire, 

earth,  seeds') 

Line  a  berry  box  with  the  lead,  fill  with  good  earth 
and  plant  vines  or  flower-seeds.  Suspend  by  ribbon 
or  wire. 

Dolls'  Furniture  (Spools,  scissors,  glue) 

1.  Table. — Make  a  table  by  cutting  a  slat  from  a 
basket  into  an  oblong  2x3  inches  and  glue  to  spool 
for  dining-table. 

2.  Bed. — Soak  a  few  moments  and  when  flexible 
cut  an  oblong  2x6  inches  and  bend  one  end  up  i^ 


1 6   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

inches  to  form  head  of  bed.  Bend  the  other  end  up 
y*  inch  to  form  the  foot.  Glue  two  spools  to  the  bot- 
tom of  this  for  legs,  one  at  each  end. 

3.  Chair. — Make  chairs  for  the  same  set  by  cut- 
ting a  piece  of  the  box  to  measure  1x2  inches.  Bend 
across  the  middle  so  that  a  right  angle  is  formed  and 
glue  one  side  to  a  spool.  The  other  half  forms  the 
back  of  the  chair.  Such  furniture  may  be  colored 
with  dyes  or  Ivory  paints, 


PEAS 

Shelling  Peas  ( Tin  pans) 

Let  the  child  help  Mother  to  shell  the  peas  for 
dinner.  Children  enjoy  work  of  this  kind  when  co- 
operating with  the  mother  or  father.  They  like  to  do 
what  Mother  is  doing  when  she  is  doing  it  too.  This 
will  be  an  excellent  time  to  tell  Hans  Andersen's  story 
of  the  "Five  Peas  that  Dwelt  in  a  Pod".  As  a  reward 
let  the  child  plant  a  few  peas  in  a  box  or  out-of-doors. 

Pea-Pod  Boat  (Pan  of  water,  pcapods) 

Give  a  small  child  a  dish-pan  filled  with  water 
and  a  peapod  for  a  boat,  with  peas  for  passengers 
and  he  will  entertain  himself  for  a  long  time.  Let  the 
frequency  with  which  he  is  allowed  this  privilege  de- 
pend upon  his  care  in  keeping  himself  and  his  sur- 
roundings dry,  thus  leading  to  neatness  and  self-con- 
trol. 

Pea  Furniture  (See  chapter  on  kindergarten  occupa- 
tions) 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket       17 

Numeral  Frame  or   Abacus    {Hair-wire,   cardboard 

stationery  box) 

Get  ten  slender  pieces  of  wire  about  six  inches  long. 
Put  one  pea  on  the  first,  two  on  the  second,  three  on 
the  third,  etc.,  until  you  reach  the  last,  on  which  place 
ten.  Take  an  empty  stationery  box,  and  cut  away  the 
bottom  leaving  the  four  sides  intact  as  a  frame.  Into 
this  frame  insert  the  ten  wires,  the  one  with  one  pea 
at  the  top,  then  No.  2,  3,  etc.  The  child  can  then  prac- 
tice counting  the  different  combinations  up  to  ten. 

Instead  of  peas  such  a  series  of  units  could  be 
made  by  stringing  cranberries  or  rose-haws  on  a 
waxed  thread. 

POTATOES  AND  SQUASH 

Potato    Horse    (Three    potatoes,    slender   sticks    or 
tooth-picks,  raveled  string  or  coarse  black  thread) 
Take  large  potato  for  body  of  horse,  a  smaller  one 
for  the  neck,  and  another  for  the  head.     Join  them 
with  sticks  broken  to  convenient  length.     Four  other 
sticks  make  the  legs,  two  little  ones  the  ears  and  the 
string  or  thread  the  flowing  tail.    The  tail  can  be  at- 
tached to  a  tack  or  pin  and  inserted. 

Squash  or  Sweet  Potato  Animals  (Crooked-neck 
squash  or  sweet  potato  for  each  animal,  slender 
sticks) 

Insert  sticks  for  legs  into  crooked-neck  squashes 
and  convert  into  animals  of  various  kinds,  the  kind 
depending  upon  the  size  of  the  neck  and  general  shape. 
Sweet  potatoes  by  their  queer  shapes  will  often  suggest 
animals:  pigs,  dogs,  etc.,  or  ducks,  swans,  ostriches, 
and  birds.  Use  tacks  or  shoe  buttons  for  eyes.  Dolls 
can  be  made  also. 


1 8   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 


CORN  HUSKS— GREEN 

Mat  (Husks,  needle,  thread) 

Take  four  smooth  husks  and  press  between  blot- 
ting paper  for  24  hours.  Then  tear  into  l/4  inch 
strips.  Lay  eight  of  these  on  the  table.  Take  eight 
more  and  weave  these  under  and  over  the  first  eight, 
making  mat  for  doll-house.  Put  again  between  blot- 
ters. The  next  day,  slide  the  strips  together  till  they 
lie  smooth  and  even,  and  close  together.  Fasten  by 
sewing  the  outside  strips  lightly  to  the  interlacing 
ones.  Cut  the  extending  parts  off  about  one  inch  from 
outside  strips. 

Feathers  (Husks,  scissors) 

Take  a  dozen  leaves  of  the  husks;  cut  slits  slant- 
wise down  the  edges  about  l/^  inch  apart.  Let  dry  24 
hours.  Then  use  as  feathers  for  Indian  head  dress, 
using  design  on  copper  cent  as  model. 


CORN-COBS—DRY 

Corn-Crib  (Cobs,  hammer,  nails,  cover  of  starch-box) 
To  a  small  piece  of  thin  wood  like  the  cover  of  a 
starch-box  nail  four  short  cobs  of  equal  length  for 
legs  (half  an  inch  or  an  inch  long).  Around  the  four 
sides,  on  top,  nail  a  row  of  slender  cobs  for  the  walls 
of  the  corn  crib.  Make  roof  of  cobs  or  lay  a  piece  of 
cardboard  across.  Nail  from  below,  through  the 
board.  It  will  require  a  little  thought  to  determine 
just  where  the  nail  must  go  in  order  to  run  through 
the  board  and  into  the  cob  above,  but  tell  the  child 
that  he  is  a  little  carpenter  and  must  make  careful 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket       19 

measurements.  Ask  if  he  can  think  why  the  crib  is 
raised  thus  from  the  ground.  (To  preserve  the  corn 
from  the  rats  and  mice.) 

Toy-Raft  (Cobs,  rim  of  berry-box,  tacks) 

Lay  six  or  more  cobs  of  equal  length  side  by 
side  upon  the  table.  Take  a  piece  of  binding-rim  of 
a  berry-box  as  long  as  the  row  of  cobs  is  wide.  Lay 
it  across  the  row  near  one  end  and  nail  it  fast  to  each 
cob.  Nail  a  similar  piece  across  the  other  end.  This 
will  make  a  serviceable  toy-raft.  Stick  in  a  skewer 
for  a  mast  and  make  a  sail-boat.  Paste  on  the  mast  a 
triangular  piece  of  paper  or  muslin  for  a  sail. 

Zig-Zag  Fence  (Cobs  only) 

Lay  down  half  a  dozen  cobs  in  zigzag  fashion, 
with  their  ends  not  quite  as  far  apart  as  the  length  of 
the  cobs.  Then  across  every  two  ends  lay  another  cob, 
and  so  build  up  the  fence. 

Post-Fence  (Cobs,  tacks,  skewers,  slats) 

Lay  several  cobs  in  a  row  a  few  inches  apart  as 
posts.  Unite  them  by  laying  across  them  two  rows 
of  skewers  or  kindergarten  slats.  Join  with  tiny  tacks. 
Use  in  the  sand-table  or  dolls'  farm. 

House  (Cobs,  nails) 

(i)  Take  two  cobs  and  place  them  opposite  to 
each  other.  Place  two  others  across  the  ends  of  the 
first  two,  at  right  angles  to  them.  Then  two  more 
directly  over  the  first  two  and  so  on,  building  up 
alternately  for  log  cabin.  This  is  the  first  simple 
building  experiment  of  the  little  child.  Two  such 
cabins  put  together  will  make  a  two-roomed  house. 
Thus  made  it  will  be  crude  with  wide  interstices  be- 


20   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

tween  the  logs,  but  this  forms  no  objection   to  the 
child. 

(2)  When  he  does  manifest  the  desire  for  some- 
thing better  made — a  house  which  will  not  admit  the 
rain  and  snow — a  more  solid  house  can  be  made  thus : 
Place  three  cobs  end  to  end  to  form  three  sides  of  a 
square.  Directly  upon  these  lay  three  more,  and  nail 
firmly  to  those  beneath  at  the  ends,  with  slender  nails. 
Build  up  in  this  way  as  high  as  desirable.  One  side 
has,  however,  been  left  open.  Now  put  in  the  fourth 
wall  but  leave  place  for  the  doorway.  Do  this  by 
making  the  lower  part  of  the  wall  of  cobs  so  short  that 
they  do  not  even  go  half  way  across  the  opening. 
Take  two  such  short  cobs  and  nail  each  to  the  side  of 
the  house.  A  little  space  will  be  left  between  them, 
say  of  two  inches.  Take  two  more  of  same  length  and 
place  on  top  of  the  first  two  and  nail  in  place.  The 
third  cob  may  be  long  enough  to  extend  straight 
across  the  little  house  making  the  top  of  the  doorway. 
Put  another  and  another  on  top  until  the  last  row  is 
reached.  Roof  with  similar  logs  or  with  cardboard. 
The  child  can  be  trained  a  little  in  forethought  when 
led  to  save  anything  like  corncobs  for  possible  use  in 
the  future. 

Furniture  (4  short  cobs,  4  long  slender  ones,  tacks1, 
cheesecloth,  fine  cord,  cotton  batting} 
Take  four  short  cobs  for  sturdy  legs.  Nail  to 
these  four  slender  cobs  for  bed-frame.  In  the  inner 
part  of  the  long  sides  of  the  bed  hammer  small  tacks 
about  y^  inches  apart.  Then  string  cord  from  one 
tack  across  to  the  opposite  one  and  so  on,  to  make 
springs.  Make  mattress  of  cheesecloth  stuffed  with 
cotton.  Other  furniture  can  easily  be  made  in  similar 
manner. 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket      2 1 

In  this  work,  as  with  other  suggestions  here  given, 
older  children  will  need  to  help  younger  ones  and  thus 
the  spirit  of  helpfulness  and  sympathy  is  exercised. 


CORN  KERNELS— DRY 

Portieres    (Kernels   of   corn,  straws,   needle,   coarse 

thread,  pan) 

Soak  corn  in  pan  of  water  over  night  or  till  soft. 
Get  inch-long  pieces  of  straw  at  kindergarten  supply 
store,  or,  if  obtainable  in  the  country,  get  the  straws 
entire  and  let  the  children  cut  them  into  inch  pieces. 
In  all  this  work  it  is  desirable  to  let  the  child  do  as 
much  as  possible  himself.  Later,  when  familiar  with 
materials  and  simple  processes,  let  him  use  the  pre- 
pared bought  material. 

Now,  let  him  string  the  corn  and  straws  alter- 
nately. He  can  then  vary  by  stringing  first  one  kernel 
and  one  straw ;  then  two  kernels  and  one  straw ;  then 
three,  etc.  This  gives  practice  in  counting,  and  ex- 
ercises also  his  sense  of  taste  and  proportion  and  his 
invention.  A  pretty  effect  can  be  secured  by  using 
kernels  of  the  two  colors,  red  and  yellow. 

Suspend  a  number  of  such  strings  in  the  door- 
way; they  may  be  all  of  the  same  length  or  may  be 
very  short  in  the  middle  of  the  doorway  and  gradually 
get  longer  as  the  jamb  is  approached. 

Designing  (Red  and  yellow  kernels) 

On  a  rainy  day  let  the  child  employ  his  inventive 
skill  in  making  designs  of  the  red  and  yellow  kernels 
on  a  flat  table.  He  can  lay  them  in  squares,  oblongs, 
crosses,  etc. 


22   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 


POP-CORN 

There  are  few  American  children  who  need  to 
be  told  how  to  pop  corn;  they  see  it  done  before  they 
are  able  to  do  it  themselves.  But  this  fascinating  oc- 
cupation is  not  known  to  many  children  outside  of  the 
United  States.  Perhaps  it  is  well  that  our  children 
should  appreciate  their  privilege  in  this  respect. 

If  a  popper  is  unobtainable,  corn  can  be  quickly 
and  deliciously  popped  by  putting  a  tablespoonful  of 
butter  in  a  deep  kettle  and  when  it  is  hot  dropping  in  a 
cupful  of  popcorn.  Shake  or  rather  stir  to  keep  from 
burning  and  in  a  short  time  the  kettle  will  be  full  of 
the  white  popping  fairy-like  kernels.  Salt  or  sugar 
can  be  sprinkled  in  as  desired. 

Balls  (Com,  popper,  sugar,  molasses  or  water) 

Make  a  thin  syrup  by  boiling  together  equal 
quantities  of  sugar  and  water  or  two  cupfuls  sugar, 
one  of  molasses  or  syrup,  one  teaspoonful  vinegar,  and 
butter  size  of  an  egg.  Cook  until  it  hardens  when 
dropped  in  water,  then  pour  it  over  8  quarts  of  popped 
corn  as  quickly  as  possible  and  mold  into  balls,  making 
about  twenty.  If  made  with  strawberry  syrup  the 
color  will  be  a  beautiful  red. 

Festoons  (Popped  corn,  needle,  coarse  thread) 

Thread  the  kernels  to  adorn  walls  or  picture 
frames  or  Christmas  tree. 

NUTS 

Boat  (Walnut  shell,  pan  of  water,  toothpicks,  candle- 
zvax) 
When  busy  with  her  baking  the  mother  can  give 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket      23 

the  three-year-old  in  his  high  chair  a  half  walnut 
shell  for  a  boat.  An  older  child  can  elaborate  into  a 
sail-boat  by  cutting  a  triangular  piece  of  paper  for 
a  sail,  glueing  it  to  a  toothpick  for  mast,  and  then 
melting  a  drop  of  wax  from  a  candle. and  inserting 
the  mast  while  the  wax  is  still  warm.  A  burnt  match 
can  be  shaped  into  a  mast  also. 

Such  a  fleet  of  tiny  vessels  would  prettily  set  a 
table  for  a  farewell  dinner  to  one  going  abroad. 

Surprise    Walnuts    (English   walnuts,    baby-ribbon, 

tiny  dolls  or  animals,  glue) 

Open  a  number  of  walnuts  carefully  so  as  not  to 
break  the  shell.  Remove  the  meats  and  fasten  the  two 
sides  together  with  a  tiny  strip  of  ribbon,  which  serves 
as  a  hinge,  glueing  the  ends  of  the  ribbon  to  the  in- 
side of  the  half  shells.  Ribbon  need  be  only  an  inch 
long  or  less.  Put  a  tiny  doll  or  a  wee  china  rabbit  or 
kitten  inside  the  shell  and  tie  around  with  ribbon. 
Little  china  animals  come  in  sets  of  five  or  six. 

A  little  verse  of  greeting  or  a  conundrum  can  be 
written  and  put  inside  if  the  toys  are  not  available. 

A  group  of  little  children  could  be  kept  busy  and 
happy  for  an  afternoon  making  some  of  these  little 
souvenirs  for  a  home  dinner  or  for  a  fair. 

Nut-Animals  (Peanuts,  toothpicks) 

The  imagination  of  most  children  will  quickly 
perceive  resemblances  to  all  kinds  of  creatures  in 
the  queer  shapes  of  peanuts.  Take  such  a  peanut 
and  stick  into  it  four  bits  of  toothpicks  for  legs  and 
two  tiny  ones  for  ears.  If  the  toothpicks  are  not 
sharp  or  strong  enough  to  penetrate  of  themselves, 
make  incisions  with  a  sharp  pin. 

One  common  shape  suggests  a  cat,  seated.    Two 


24   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

vertical  pieces  would  make  the  front  legs  and  two 
horizontal  pieces  the  back  legs  resting  on  the  ground. 
Eyes  and  mouth  can  be  inked  in.  Another  shape 
hints  at  an  owl  with  sharp,  curved  beak.  Another 
will  make  a  hen.  Once  started  on  this  line  of  experi- 
ment, the  child  will  discover  likenesses  for  himself. 
These  creatures  can  be  used  in  the  toy  farm, 

Peanut  party  (See  page 


APPLES 

Candlestick  (Apple,  candle} 

Cut  in  the  top  of  a  rosy  apple  a  hole  of  right 
size  to  hold  a  candle.  Appropriate  for  Thanksgiving. 

A  carrot  can  also  be  used  thus,  but  a  part  must 
be  cut  away  at  the  bottom  so  as  to  secure  a  firm 
base. 

ORANGES 

Baskets  (Orange,  smaller  fruits) 

Cut  an  orange  horizontally  partly  through  the 
middle  from  each  side  so  as  to  leave  a  part  in  the 
centre  which  can  be  cut  into  a  handle.  Hollow  out 
the  interior  and  put  raisins,  small  nuts,  etc.,  in  it. 


RED  PEPPERS 

Lantern  (Large  red  pepper,  knife} 

Hollow  out  a  large  red  pepper  and  cut  into  it 
eyes,  nose  and  mouth,  making  a  miniature  Jack-o'- 
lantern.  This  makes  a  pretty  table  decoration. 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket      25 

Let  the  child  help  as  much  as  possible  by  making 
these  little  table  decorations.  If  you  want  boy  and 
girl  to  love  home,  give  them  a  share  in  making  it  in- 
teresting and  attractive.  Do  not  discourage  them  if 
their  efforts  are  a  little  crude  at  times.  It  is  the 
spirit  of  good- will  which  makes  the  blessed  home. 


EGG-SHELLS 

Garden  (Shell,  earth,  birdseed) 

Cut  an  egg-shell  in  half  horizontally,  with  a  sharp 
pair  of  scissors,  and  three  days  before  Easter  put  into 
it  a  little  earth,  place  in  this  a  little  canary  seed,  or 
a  single  pea  or  bean,  and  a  little  plant  will  delight  the 
child. 

Doll's  Cradle  (Shell,  ribbon  half  an  inch  wide,  paste, 

cardboard) 

Take  a  smooth  white  egg  and  blow  it.  To  do 
this  make  a  tiny  pin-hole  in  each  end,  and  by  blowing 
into  one  end  steadily  the  contents  can  be  emptied  out 
of  the  other.  Draw  lines  lengthwise  and  crosswise 
around  the  shell,  dividing  it  into  four  equal  parts. 
Then,  following  the  line,  cut  away  the  upper  quarter 
toward  the  small  end.  This  leaves  a  cradle  with  a 
small  canopy.  Paste  the  ribbon  neatly  around  for  a 
binding  round  the  edge.  Rockers  can  be  made  by 
cutting  curved  pieces  ]/+  inch  wide  out  of  thick  card- 
board, although  such  a  cradle  will  rock  without  rock- 
ers. 

Mattress  for  above.  (Thin  white  ribbon,  milk- 
weed doivn,  needle,  sewing  silk) 

Cut  and  sew  the  ribbon  into  a  tiny  mattress  for 
this  fairy  cradle,  and  stuff  with  milkweed  down.  If 


26   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

the  ribbon  is  just  the  width  of  the  cradle  the  edges 
of  the  mattress  can  be  neatly  overcast.  A  tiny  doll 
may  then  be  placed  within  the  cradle. 

Boat    (Goose-egg,    leatherette    paper,    kindergarten 

slats) 

Blow  the  egg  as  described  above.  Cut  in  half 
lengthwise.  Cut  the  paper  into  strips  1/2  inch  wide. 
In  each  side  of  the  shell  cut  an  indentation  y%  inches 
deep  and  ^  inches  wide  for  oarlocks.  Then  bind 
neatly  with  the  paper  strips.  Cut  the  slats  (or  a 
piece  of  berry  box  will  do)  into  tiny  oars  and  paste 
a  seat  across,  which  is  also  cut  out  of  a  slat. 

Careful  handling  is  required  for  these  dainty 
toys,  and  if  the  child  seems  to  get  nervous  let  her  do 
only  a  little  at  a  time;  but  much  neatness  and  skill 
is  exercised  in  the  making,  and  it  is  good  practice  for 
older  children.  The  wise  mother  soon  learns  to  de- 
tect the  difference  between  the  poor  work  which  is 
the  result  of  pure  nervousness  and  that  which  is  the 
consequence  of  carelessness.  The  latter  should  never 
be  permitted  to  stand.  See  to  it  that  what  the  child 
does  is  up  to  his  best  capacity. 

Humpty-Dumpty  Eggs  (Shell,  shot,  water-color 
paints,  a  bit  of  cotton-batting,  and  a  bit  of  tough 
paper) 

Take  a  shell  and  empty  of  contents  as  described 
above.  Enlarge  the  hole  at  one  end  sufficiently  to 
drop  in  a  dozen  tiny  shot  obtainable  at  hardware 
store.  Paste  over  the  opening  the  bit  of  paper,  and 
on  that  a  little  cotton  to  simulate  hair.  Paint  upon 
the  surface  eyes,  nose,  and  mouth.  A  comical  litle 
toy  which  always  regains  its  balance,  however  placed, 
is  the  result.  In  playing  with  this  the  child  uncon- 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket       27 

sciously  imbibes  a  few  ideas  about  equilibrium,  equi- 
poise, etc.  Tell  him  you  want  him  to  be  a  man  that, 
however  placed,  will  always  be  able  to  get  upon  his 
feet  again. 

Foot-ball,   or   rather  it  might  be  called   Breath-ball 

(Egg-shell,  -water-color  paints) 

Take  an  empty  shell  and  paint  to  resemble  a  foot- 
ball or  in  some  college  or  High  School  colors.  See 
page  99  for  directions  for  game. 

Toy  Lamp  (See  under  Doll-Houses) 


PRUNES  AND  RAISINS 

Turtle   (Raisin  and  five  cloves') 

Take  a  plump  raisin  and  stick  into  it  five  cloves 
for  head  and  legs. 

Man  (Raisins  or  prunes,  toothpicks} 

Make  a  man  by  running  a  toothpick  through 
three  raisins  for  a  body.  Into  the  top  one  stick  two 
other  toothpicks,  with  two  raisins  each  for  arms  and 
two  other  toothpicks  with  raisins  make  the  legs.  Each 
leg  has  a  projecting  raisin  for  a  foot  and  another 
large  raisin  makes  the  head.  These  are  fun-makers 
for  a  children's  party,  one  at  each  plate. 


SEEDS 

Stringing   (Squash  seeds — dried,  strong  thread,  nee- 
dle) 
Little  children  can  be  happily  occupied  making 


28   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

chains  of  squash,  pumpkin,  and  water-melon  seeds 
that  have  been  saved  and  made  soft  by  soaking 
awhile  in  water.  The  black  seeds  of  the  water-melon 
alternate  prettily  with  the  white  seeds  of  the  other 
gourds.  Variety  can  be  introduced  by  stringing  sev- 
eral of  one  color  and  then  several  of  another,  counting 
by  twos,  threes,  etc.  This  gives  exercise  in  counting, 
in  pleasing  grouping  of  colors,  and  so  exercises  both 
the  invention  and  the  taste  of  the  very  little  child. 

Designing  (Black  seeds,  white  seeds} 

Let  the  child  make  designs  of  the  seeds  upon 
the  table.  Place  a  black  one  for  a  centre  and  a  white 
one  on  each  side.  Repeat  this  figure  for  a  foot  or  more, 
placing  the  groups  an  inch  apart  and  observe  the 
effect.  Tell  him  thus  to  make  a  design  for  the  frieze 
of  the  room.  Another  effect  is  produced  by  placing 
a  white  seed  as  a  centre  and  placing  four  or  five 
around  it.  Vary  still  further  by  placing  a  circle  of 
black  seeds  around  the  whole.  These  few  examples 
will  serve  to  indicate  the  endless  variety  that  can  be 
secured,  and  is  a  training  in  invention  and  taste.  Let 
the  child  always  have  in  mind  a  design  for  some  par- 
ticular purpose,  as  of  wall-paper,  oil-cloth,  etc.  Lead 
him  to  observe  similar  effects  in  carpets,  wall-paper, 
etc.  The  best  of  these  attempts  can  be  made  com- 
paratively permanent  by  pasting  upon  small  sheets 
of  tinted  bristol-board.  The  chief  value  in  preserv- 
ing any  such  work  is  for  purposes  of  comparison  as 
the  child  improves. 

Counters 

Save  out  24  white  and  24  black  seeds  for  coun- 
ters in  checkers,  go-bang,  etc. 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket      29 


Squash-Seed  Chicken   (<?5  seeds,  white  thread,  two 

quill  toothpicks,  bit  of  red  flannel,  feather  from 

duster) 

Take  25  squash  seeds  and  soak  till  soft.     Take 
five  of  these    and  place  side  by  side  wiih  pointed  ends 
up.     Above    these    place    four,    their 
wide  ends  coming  between  the  points 
of    the    others.     Above    these    place 
three   in   the   same   relative   position. 
Above  these  put  two,  and  above  these 
and  between  them  place  the  squash- 
seed  which  is  to  be  the  head  of  the 
chicken. 

Now,  beneath  the  original  five, 
place  four,  pointed  ends  up ;  beneath 
these  put  three,  then  two,  then  one. 
If  these  are  rightly  placed,  the  pointed 
ends  of  one  row  come  just  at  the 
sides  of  the  wide  end  of  the  seeds 
above. 

Run  a  thread  through  the  lower 
end  of  the  two  and  the  upper  end  of 
the  three;  then  through  the  lower  end 
of  three  and  the  upper  end  of  the 
four;  continue  thus  till  all  have  been 
united.    The  result  thus  far  will  be  a 
double  pyramid  of  the  seeds.     Draw 
an   eye   in   the   middle   of  the   head, 
paste  or  sew  on  a  bit  of  quill  for  a 
bill  and  a  bit  of  flannel  for  a  comb. 
Attach    a     few     feathers     from    the 
duster  for  a  tail.     Take  two  more  seeds  and  sew  to 
the  middle  of  the  row  of  five  for  the  thigh  of  the  legs, 
and  to  each  sew  a  quill  for  the  rest  of  the  legs,  cutting 
into  points  at  one  end  for  toes. 


How  to  String 
the  Seeds. 


30  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 


Squash-Seed  Chicken. 

Make  another  chicken  like  the  above  and  sus- 
pend the  two  face  to  face  upon  a  slender  stick  by  run- 
ning a  thread  through  the  head  and  one  through  the 
tail.  When  the  stick  is  moved  the  chickens  assume 
very  realistic  attitudes.  A  comical  toy,  made  with 
no  expense  save  that  of  time  and  patience.  (See 
illustrations.) 

Pincushion  or  Penwiper    (Five  plump  apple-seeds, 
sharp  pen-knife,  black  thread,  stiff  card,  square 
of  muslin,  emery  or  cotton  batting) 
Save  out  five  seeds,  and  cut  the  cuticle  of  the 

large  end  into  two  tiny  points  to  simulate  the  ears 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket       31 

of  a  mouse.  Knot  the  thread  and  run  a  tiny  bit 
through  for  a  tail.  Paste  these  upon  a  visiting  card, 
and  near  them  paste  a  tiny  bag  made  of  white  muslin 
to  simulate  a  flour-bag.  It  can  be  stuffed  with  cot- 
ton or  with  emery  for  needles  or  pins.  Or  the  card 
can  be  sewn  upon  several  layers  of  cloth  as  decoration 
for  a  penwiper. 

Imitation  Water 

Muskmelon  seeds  placed  in   an  undulating  line 
in  the  sand-box  suggest  water. 


SOAP 

Hammering  (Old-fashioned  bar  soap,  hammer,  nails) 
A  wee  child  will  entertain  himself  for  a  long  time 
by  hammering  nails  into  a  bar  of  soap  if  the  proper 
tools  be  given  him.  In  this  simple  activity  he  exer- 
cises both  mind  and  body.  It  requires  good  coordi- 
nation on  the  part  of  the  little  one  to  strike  -the  nail 
just  right,  and  he  enjoys  not  only  the  exercise  itself, 
but  also  the  pleasure  of  imitating  the  carpenter  who 
uses  the  hammer  so  skilfully. 

Drawing  (White  soap,  window-pane) 

On  a  day  when  he  must  stay  indoors,  give  your 
child  a  piece  of  white  soap  and  let  him  show  you  what 
he  can  draw  upon  the  window-pane.  Ships  and  trees, 
houses  and  flowers  have  a  fairy-like  appearance  when 
drawn  with  this  commonplace  material  upon  the  im- 
promptu background  of  glass.  This  allows  the  free- 
dom of  movement  found  in  blackboard  work.  It 
gives  scope  to  the  child's  imaginative  powers  and 
should  add  nothing  to  the  housekeeper's  cares,  being 


32   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

readily  removed  with  a  damp  cloth.  It  may  reveal 
creative  possibilities  in  some  otherwise  "mute,  in- 
glorious" artist. 

CEREAL  BOXES 

Moving- Van  (Cereal-box,  glue,  two  skewers,  4  but- 
ton-molds, 4  nails  or  strong  pins) 
Take  a  box  (Quaker  Oats  or  Force,  etc.).  Cut 
out  doors  and  side  openings  for  a  moving-van.  It 
may  be  well  to  draw  these  first.  For  a  model,  look 
at  any  van  or  grocer's  wagon.  It  will  be  seen  that 
models  are  numerous  and  various.  If  more  explicit 
directions  are  required  we  give  the  following,  al- 
though it  is  always  well  to  have  the  child  use  his  own 
mind  as  far  as  possible  before  going  to  others  for 
ideas. 

Remove  the  top  of  the  box,  which  becomes  the 
front  of  the  wagon.  The  bottom  of  the  box  will  be 
the  back  of  the  wagon.  This  bottom  will  be  found 
to  consist  of  two  layers  of  cardboard.  Remove  the 
outer  one  and  cut  the  inner  one  once  through  the 
middle  to  make  two  doors.  On  each  side  of  the 
wagon  cut  an  oblong  window  l/2  inch  from  the  top, 
V-2.  inch  from  the  bottom,  and  y2  inch  from  the  front. 
Let  it  be  two  inches  wide.  Place  a  seat  across  from 
one  window  to  the  other;  fasten  with  glue.  It  may 
be  just  a  straight  piece  one  inch  wide,  or  may  be  two 
inches  wide,  folded  once  through  the  middle  length- 
wise to  give  a  back. 

For  wheels  use  wooden  button-molds,  two  inches 
wide,  or  circles  sawed  from  a  broom  handle.  For 
axles  use  wooden  skewers  or  cut  a  piece  from  a  stick 
of  kindling  wood  about  54  mcn  wide.  Whittle  the 
ends  till  they  are  slender  enough  to  hold  the  button- 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket       33 

molds.  Then  put  on  the  wheels,  inserting  a  slender 
nail  or  pin  outside  to  keep  them  from  coming  off  the 
axle.  Glue  the  axle  to  the  box.  If  wheels  are  cut 
from  broom-handle,  a  nail  can  be  driven  through  the 
centre  for  an  axle  and  then  pushed  into  the  side  of 
the  box,  or  a  nail  pushed  through  a  button-mold 
directly  into  the  box  will  hold. 

Punch  two  holes  into  the  front  of  the  wagon, 
tie  cord  through  and  the  wagon  can  be  drawn  along. 
It  may  be  painted  if  desired.  For  horses,  trace  a 
picture  of  a  horse  from  some  book  or  advertisement 
on  cardboard,  cut  out  and  harness  to  wagon. 

Lantern  (Box,  scissors,  candle,  pencil} 

Draw  on  the  box  holes  to  represent  eyes,  nose 
and  mouth.  Then  cut  these  out.  Cut  holes  near  the 
top  of  box  to  put  wires  through  for  carrying  the 
box.  Use  a  wire  about  two  feet  long,  put  the  ends 
through  the  holes  and  bend  up.  Let  a  little  of  the 
wax  drip  from  the  end  of  the  candle  to  the  bottom 
of  the  inside  of  the  box,  and  when  a  soft  centre  has 
been  made  push  the  candle  down  and  it  will  stand 
firm.  Only  older  children  should  use  these,  lest  harm 
result.  But  children  do  make  them  at  election  times 
for  transparencies.  The  openings  may  be  lined  with 
colored  tissue  paper. 

House  (Cereal  box,  paste,  scissors,  wall-paper,  etc.) 

Remove  one  broad  side.  Stand  box  on  one  long 
narrow  side  as  room  of  doll's  house.  Cut  an  opening 
in  the  remaining  broad  side  for  a  window.  Furnish 
with  paper  furniture.  (See  page  85.) 


34  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 


EDAM  CHEESE 

Lantern  (Cheese,  knife,  candle) 

After  the  interior  of  one  of  these  round,  red 
cheeses  has  been  scooped  out  and  eaten  by  the  family, 
the  discarded  red  shell  will  make  a  fine  Jack-o'-lan- 
tern, if  the  proper  holes  for  eyes,  nose  and  mouth  be 
cut  into  it  and  a  candle  inserted  inside.  The  candle 
may  be  inserted  in  a  socket  cut  into  the  bottom  of 
the  rind,  or  it  may  be  made  to  stand  firmly  in  a  bed 
of  wax  or  tallow  melted  from  its  own  lower  end. 

SALT 

Play  for  Baby  (Fine  table  salt,  spoon,  bottle,  small 

box  or  pan) 

If  clean  fine  sand  is  not  at  the  moment  available, 
give  the  baby  a  box  containing  a  heap  of  salt  and  a 
teaspoon  and  bottle,  and  he  will  be  happy  for  a  long 
time,  passing  the  salt  from  one  bottle  or  box  to  an- 
other. To  the  young  mother  this  may  seem  akin  to 
foolishness,  but  in  thus  playing  simply  with  sand  or 
with  salt  the  baby  is  exercising  faculties  and  working 
out  baby  problems  which  he  should  be  given  oppor- 
tunity to  try.  He  is  becoming  acquainted  with  his 
environment,  his  little  world. 

TIN  CANS 

Burnt-Match  Safe  (Mustard  box,  oil  paints,  brush, 

ribbon,  nail,  hammer) 

Punch  two  holes  near  the  upper  edge  of  a  dis- 
carded mustard  box,  the  holes  to  be  opposite  each 
other.  These  may  be  made  by  hammering  a  nail 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket       35 

through  the  tin,  holding  the  box  firmly  against  a 
block  of  wood  or  stone  for  pressure. 

With  oil  paints,  one  color,  begin  at  the  top  to 
paint  the  box,  graduating  from  light  to  darker  tones 
as  the  bottom  is  approached.  Lighter  tones  may  be 
secured  by  mixing  the  blue  or  red  with  Chinese  white. 
A  flower  design  may  be  painted  by  one  skilled  in 
the  use  of  the  brush. 

Tie  ribbon  through  the  holes  by  which  to  sus- 
pend the  box,  and  the  result  is  an  article  both  useful 
and  pretty. 

Flower-Pot  (Can,  ivory  paints,  brush) 

Paint  an  empty  can  with  green  or  brown  ivory 
paint  and  use  as  flower-pot  for  growing  plant.  Chil- 
dren love  to  handle  a  paint-brush,  and  this  offers  a 
legitimate  occasion  for  such  occupation.  A  small  hole 
should  be  punched  in  bottom  of  can  for  drainage. 

Hanging-Basket    (Can,   nail,   hammer,   cord,   raffia) 
Punch  holes  for  suspending  as  described  above. 
Then  make  a  covering  of  raffia  as  explained  on  page 
46  and  hang  up  by  the  cord. 

Wheels  (Covers  of  baking-powder  tins,  nail,  hammer) 
With  the  nail,  hammer  a  hole  through  the  centre  of 
the  cover,  placing  upon  a  stone  step  or  other  brace. 
The  little  wheels  may  be  used  to  complete  toy  wagons 
that  the  child  is  making. 

TIN  FOIL 

Toy  Dishes   (Tin  foil  from  cream-cheese  wrappers, 

etc.) 

Take  the  tin  foil,  and  by  simple  squeezing  and 
pressing  and  shaping,  a  little  practice  will  enable  one 


36  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

to  make  it  into  tiny  pitchers,  goblets,  pans,  etc.,  for 
dolly's  table. 

Toy  Mirror  (Tin  foil,  scissors) 

Smooth  carefully  with  the  fingers  and  cut  a  piece 
of  the  tin  foil  into  the  shape  and  size  to  fit  a  little 
cardboard  bureau. 

A  larger  piece  will  simulate  water  in  the  sand- 
box park. 

Toy  Money  (Tin  foil,  coin,  scissors) 

Smooth  the  tin  foil  with  the  thumb  nail,  place  a 
cent  or  a  nickel  beneath,  and  press  and  smooth  again, 
making  an  impression  of  the  coin  that  may  be  cut 
out  and  used  in  playing  store. 

Toy  Cutlery  (Tin  foil,  scissors) 

Cut  tiny  knives,  forks  and  spoons  out  of  the  tin 
foil  for  the  paper-dolls'  table. 

CORK 

Save  all  corks  and  they  may  be  used  in  a  variety 
of  ways. 

Toy  Raft  (Cork,  unre  or  hairpins) 

Run  several  corks  on  a  piece  of  wire  to  resemble 
a  log;  make  several  such  and  then  tie  together  to 
make  a  raft,  tying  between  the  corks. 

Toy  Boat  (Circular  flat  cork,  tacks,  wire,  toothpick, 

paper) 

Insert  a  toothpick  in  one  of  the  large  flat  corks 
that  sometimes  cover  pickle  glasses.  Paste  a  paper 
triangle  upon  this  for  a  sail  and  set  afloat  in  a  dish- 
pan  sea. 


The  Secrets  of  the  Market  Basket       37 

Flower-Rack  (Flat  cork,  pencil} 

Take  a  flat  piece  of  cork  such  as  is  used  by  ento- 
mologists upon  which  to  impale  insects,  or  any  flat, 
thin  piece  of  cork  will  do  if  several  inches  in  diameter. 
Such  cork  may  be  easily  perforated  by  a  slender  pen- 
cil. Make  a  number  of  perforations  several  inches 
apart,  and  then  the  cork  may  rest  upon  a  water-filled 
saucer  or  other  deep  dish,  and  the  stalks  of  single 
flowers  may  be  inserted  into  the  holes  so  that  they  are 
supported  by  the  cork. 

Furniture  (Circular  corks,  pins,  worsted  of  pleasing 

color,  cashmere  or  silk  goods} 

Into  the  upper  side  of  a  round  cork  about  one 
inch  in  diameter  insert  five  to  seven  pins.  Twist  and 
weave  the  worsted  in  and  out,  under  and  over  those 
pins,  so  as  to  make  a  firm,  solid  back  to  a  little  chair. 
The  ends  of  the  worsted  may  be  neatly  disposed  of 
by  threading  on  a  needle  and  running  in  and  out  for 
a  few  stitches  till  concealed. 

For  legs,  insert  four  strong  pins,  and  wind  these 
round  and  round  with  the  worsted,  finishing  neatly 
by  running  with  a  needle  in  and  out. 

If  the  seat  seems  too  plain  it  may  first,  before 
the  chair  is  made,  be  covered  with  silk  or  cashmere. 
To  do  this  cut  the  cloth  into  a  circle  somewhat  larger 
than  the  diameter  of  the  cork.  Run  a  gathering 
thread  around  the  circumference,  and  putting  the 
cork  in  the  centre  draw  the  thread  and  so  gather  be- 
neath the  seat.  To  make  a  really  neat  finish  the  edge 
should  be  turned  in  before  gathering. 

Swimming-Float  (Dozens  of  corks,  strong  canvas 
cloth,  measuring  20  x  jd  inches,  needle,  thread) 
Make  two  strong  canvas  bags,  measuring  about 


38   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

1 8  x  20  inches.  Fill  these  with  corks  to  act  as  floats. 
Unite  the  two  bags  by  a  strong  band  of  canvas  about 
7  x  20  inches  in  size,  and  let  the  children  use  when 
in  bathing. 

Cork  in  Art 

In  making  models  of  world-renowned  buildings, 
such  as  churches,  cathedrals,  temples,  etc.,  cork  is 
used  in  large  and  small  pieces. 

In  Germany  it  is  used  in  making  pictures.  A 
sky  background  is  painted  in  in  water-color,  and  the 
flat  pieces  of  cork  are  cut  into  shape  and  glued  on 
to  represent  walls  and  towers  of  buildings.  The 
foliage  of  trees  is  represented  by  the  more  spongy 
pieces  of  cork,  and  the  effects  secured  are  interesting 
and  beautiful.  The  children  may  like  to  experiment 
and  see  what  they  can  do  in  this  direction. 

Cork  Doll  (See  page  81} 


CHAPTER  II 

MOTHER  NATURE'S  HORN  OF  PLENTY 

Many  of  the  articles  named  under  the  Market 
Basket  Division  of  this  book  could  be  classified  also 
under  the  above  head.  In  addition  we  present  the 
following : 

STONES  AND  PEBBLES 

Collections   (Stones,  small  boxes) 

Collect  various  pretty  little  stones  and  pebbles  on 
river  shore,  coast  or  roadway,  and  classify  in  different 
ways — according  to  color,  shape,  size.  This  exercises 
the  child's  observing  powers  and  trains  him  in  detect- 
ing differences  and  resemblances.  Keep  in  small  boxes. 

Bottled  Pebbles  (Pebbles,  plain  glass  bottle) 

Put  some  pretty  pebbles  in  a  glass  bottle  filled 
with  water  which  intensifies  the  color.  Send  to  some 
sick  friend,  especially  some  one  from  the  prairies  who 
may  seldom  see  stones.  It  is  always  well  for  the 
child  to  have  some  definite  object  in  view  when  he 
does  anything. 

Toy  Path-Markers 

Use  pebbles  in  the  sand-box  for  outlining  the  lit- 
tle paths  in  the  wee  park  or  farm. 

Jackstones 

Pebbles  of  right  size  and  shape  make  good  jack- 
stones. 

39 


40  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Toy  Vegetables  (Small  square  of  cheesecloth,  needle, 

thread,  pebbles) 

Make  tiny  cheesecloth  bags  and  use  pebbles  as 
potatoes,  apples,  etc.,  in  play  with  the  little  wagons 
made  by  the  child.  In  playing  store  with  them  comes 
opportunity  for  counting  and  measuring.  Tiny  boxes 
can  be  used  for  quart  and  pint  measures,  and  the  child 
may  be  shown  that  two  pints  make  one  quart,  etc. 

Paper-Weight   (Large,  smooth  stone,  oil-paints) 

If  you  find  a  large,  smooth  stone  of  pretty  tone, 
let  the  older  child  decorate  it  with  a  little  picture  done 
in  oil  paints. 


SHELLS 

Collections  (Shells,  small  boxes) 

Collect  and  classify  according  to  color,  shape, 
etc.,  and  keep  in  separate  boxes. 

Bottled  Shells  (Shells,  bottle) 

Put  little  shells  in  bottle  of  water  to  bring  out 
lovely  colors.  (See  Bottled  Pebbles  above.) 

Border  for  Sand-Table 

Place  small  shells  along  little  paths  in  sand-table, 
sometimes  with  concave  side  up  and  vice  versa. 

Larger  shells,  as  clamshells,  make  fine  borders 
for  roads  and  paths  in  the  country.  They  outline  the 
road  on  a  dark  night. 

Water-Color-Cups 

Collect  and  save  shells  to  give  to  some  artist 
friend  as  extra  cups  for  his  water-color  paints. 


Mother  Nature's  Horn  of  Plenty       41 

Ramekin  Dishes 

Large  shells  make  serviceable  individual  dishes 
for  baked  fish,  etc.  Appropriate  for  fish  dinner. 

Individual  Salt  and  Butter  Dishes 

These  can  be  made  of  the  smaller  pink  and  yellow 
shells  found  on  many  coasts.  Let  the  children  collect 
shells  for  this  purpose,  and  use  for  fish  dinner. 

Toy-Boat 

A  small  shell  is  often  found  which,  with  the  little 
natural  seat  found  at  one  end,  at  once  suggests  a  little 
boat.  Have  the  children  collect  and  save  for  those 
far  from  the  shore. 

Pin-Tray  (Scallop  shell,  oil-paints) 

Paint  a  marine  view  in  oils  inside  a  shell  for  pin- 
tray. 

Pin-Cushion    (Small  piece  of  satin  or  velvet,  saiv- 
dust,  glue,  two  perfect  scallop-shells') 
Make  a  small  pin-cushion  of  satin  or  velvet,  filled 
with  saw-dust,  and  glue  between  a  pair  of  scallop 
shells,  so  that  it  fits  in  between  as  they  open  out. 

Piano  Scarf  (Several   dozen  small,  thin,  yellow  shells 

found   on  Atlantic  coast,  one  yard  Nile  green 

India  silk,  strong  sewing  silk) 

Hem  the  silk  an  inch  deep  at  each  end.  Sew  to 
one  end  a  fringe  of  shells  made  as  follows : 

The  shells  usually  have  a  tiny  hole  in  them  when 
found.  If  not,  one  is  easily  pierced  by  a  strong 
needle.  Take  twelve  lengths  of  strong  sewing  silk, 
white,  each  20  inches  long.  To  each  of  these  tie 
twelve  shells  at  intervals  of  an  inch  each.  You  will 


42   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

then  have  twelve  strings  of  shells,  which  are  to  be 
sewed  to  the  scarf  as  a  fringe,  putting  them  about 
three  inches  apart.  Sew  two  rows  of  shells  directly 
on  the  scarf  itself,  putting  them  about  four  inches 
apart  each  way.  If  desired,  in  making  the  fringe 
some  of  the  strings  may  be  shorter  than  others,  ar- 
ranged so  that  the  long  and  short  ones  alternate. 


BIRCH  BARK 

Needle-Case  or  Penwiper  (Squares  of  chamois  skin 

or  flannel,  sewing-silk,  paint) 

Cut  bark  into  circles,  squares,  oblongs,  etc.  Dec- 
orate with  gold  lettering  or  borders  of  gold.  Make 
several  leaves  of  flannel  or  chamois  skin  and  sew  the 
bark  on  to  these  as  a  cover.  The  flannel  may  be  scal- 
loped. An  appropriate  sentiment  to  write  upon  pen- 
wiper cover  is  "Extracts  from  the  pen  of — "  putting 
in  the  name  of  the  recipient.  The  leaves  and  cover 
may  be  sewed  together  with  a  cross-stitch. 

Handkerchief-Box  (Punch,  several  strands  of  raffia") 
Cut  two  pieces  of  bark  6x6  inches.  Cut  four 
others  3x6  inches.  Along  the  edge  of  these  punch 
(with  a  conductor's  punch  or  one  that  can  be  bought 
at  a  kindergarten  supply  place)  holes  an  inch  apart 
and  l/4  inch  from  edge.  Sew  the  four  narrow  pieces 
to  the  square  for  bottom  and  sides  of  box.  Sew 
remaining  square  more  loosely  to  one  side  as  cover. 
Sew  with  strands  of  raffia,  sewing  through  the  holes 
already  made.  If  desired  to  give  a  more  finished  ap- 
pearance punch  more  holes  along  edge  of  box  and  lid, 
making  them  }4  inch  apart.  Then  hold  a  fine  basket 
reed  or  piece  of  raffia  along  the  edges  and  overcast. 


Mother  Nature's  Horn  of  Plenty       43 

If  lavender  or  sweet  grass  is  obtainable,  that  will 
be  even  better  than  reed  or  raffia  for  the  edge,  lend- 
ing its  fragrance  to  the  gift.  The  box  can  be  still 
further  finished  by  lining  with  dainty  silk.  Make 
glove  box  in  same  way,  but  longer  in  proportion  to 
width. 

Pencil  and  Paint-Brush  Box  (Bark,  raffia,  needle  or 

crochet  hook) 

This  is  cylindrical.  Cut  a  piece  of  bark  5x8 
inches.  Punch  in  it  a  series  of  holes  24  of  an  inch 
apart,  and  l/2.  inch  from  edge  of  each  short  side. 
Place  these  so  that  one  edge  overlaps  the  other  and 
the  holes  coincide  with  one  another.  Then  sew  to- 
gether with  raffia.  Use  a  short  needle  or  none  at  all. 
Raffia  can  be  drawn  through  holes  with  a  crochet- 
hook.  Punch  holes  in  the  lower  end  of  this  cylinder 
and  cut  a  circle  of  same  size  as  diameter  of  cylinder 
out  of  cardboard.  Punch  corresponding  holes  in 
this  and  sew  the  bottom  in.  Strengthen  top  by  over- 
casting over  a  twist  of  raffia,  sweet  grass  or  sweet 
clover. 

Canoe  (Bark,  pencil,  thread,  paper,  paraffine) 

Fold  strong  piece  of  bark  and  cut  an  outline  of 
a  canoe,  rounding  the  ends.  Sew  the  ends  closely 
together  with  stout  thread,  overcasting  the  edges  with 
same.  Make  watertight  by  lining  with  paper  dipped 
in  melted  paraffine.  Paraffine  may  be  bought  at  gro- 
cer's. 

Fan,  modeled  after  East  Indian  pattern   (Bark,  kin- 
dling wood,  dye,  gold  paint} 
Cut  two  stiff  pieces  of  bark  into  hatchet-shaped 

trapezoid.    Punch  row  of  holes  in  the  narrowest  side, 


44   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

whittle  a  handle  of  pinewood,  and  sew  it  to  the  nar- 
row edge  of  bark  over  and  over  through  the  holes. 

The  handle  may  be  stained  with  some  natural 
dye  and  fan  decorated  with  gold  paint. 

Picture-Frame  (Bark,  punch,  sweet  grass) 

Cut  two  pieces  of  bark  4x5  inches,  one  of  smooth 
bark,  one  of  the  outer  bark  with  pleasing  markings. 
Punch  holes  around  the  edges  of  each  24  inches  apart. 
In  the  rough  outside  piece  cut  an  oval  2T/2  x  3  inches. 
Around  this  inner  oval  punch  holes  near  together  and 
bind  this  around  with  sweet  grass  overcast  with  fine 
raffia.  Now  sew  the  two  pieces  of  bark  together, 
first  cutting  into  the  back  piece  a  slit  near  the  bottom 
into  which  to  slide  the  photograph. 

In  using  sweet  grass  as  binding  it  is  well  to  wind 
the  bunch  first  with  thread  to  hold  the  pieces  together, 
and  after  the  grass  is  firmly  sewed  the  temporary 
thread  can  be  cut  away.  The  bunch  of  grass  thus 
used  may  be  about  as  thick  as  half  the  little  finger. 

Punch  may  be  bought  at  kindergarten  store,  or 
conductor's  punch  will  do. 


GOURDS 
Darhing-Egg 

A  smooth  well-shaped  gourd  (mock-orange) 
makes  a  serviceable  darning  egg. 

Hanging-Basket  (Large  gourd,  soil,  plant) 

Clear  the  gourd  of  fibre  and  seeds,  after  cutting 
off  the  top  rim  evenly.  Pierce  the  top  with  two  holes 
through  which  to  attach  cord  for  hanging,  fill  with  a 
light,  loose  soil,  and  plant  in  it  a  drooping,  trailing 
plant.  Cut  a  hole  in  the  lower  end  to  allow  for  drain- 


Mother  Nature's  Horn  of  Plenty       45 

age.      Let   the   country   child    save   gourds   of   good 
shape  to  present,  thus  filled,  to  city  friends. 


VEGETABLES 

Sweet-Potato  Vine 

Put  a  sweet  potato  in  sandy  loam  in  a  hanging 
basket  and  water  occasionally.  It  will  produce  a  beau- 
tiful, graceful  vine. 

Carrot-Top 

Cut  off  the  top  of  a  young  carrot  evenly  and  place 
it  on  top  of  a  pot  filled  with  sand.  Moisten  well,  and 
keep  in  the  dark  till  it  has  begun  to  sprout ;  when  the 
leaves  appear  take  it  out,  and  the  word  "Carrot-top" 
will  acquire  a  new  meaning,  the  result  is  so  pretty. 

Turnip 

Take  a  turnip  and  clean  the  outside,  taking  care 
not  to  injure  the  parts  from  which  the  leaves  spring. 
Cut  a  piece  off  the  bottom  and  scoop  out  the  inside, 
leaving  the  top  intact.  Fasten  string  or  wire  to  it 
so  as  to  hang  it  upside  down.  Fill  and  keep  filled 
with  water,  and  soon  the  leaves  will  sprout  and  curl 
up,  forming  a  beautiful  natural  hanging  basket. 


RAFFIA 

This  flexible  fiber,  long  used  by  florists,  is  now 
also  used  a  great  deal  in  the  schools  for  the  educa- 
tional hand-training  it  affords.  It  can  be  obtained 
at  kindergarten  supply  places. 


46   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Reins 

Take  three  to  six  strands  and  braid  into  reins 
for  playing  horse.  As  the  ends  of  the  strands  are 
approached  (each  is  about  a  yard  long)  begin  to 
weave  in  a  new  strand,  as  inconspicuously  as  possi- 
ble. Do  not  have  the  strands  all  exactly  the  same 
length  to  begin  with,  because  if  you  reach  the  end 
of  all  at  the  same  time  it  makes  it  difficult  to  weave 
in  new  ones  neatly. 
Mat 

Take  such  a  long  braid  as  described  above,  and 
holding  one  end  flat,  turn  it  round  and  round  spirally 
but  flat,  and  sew  with  thread  to  make  a  mat  for  the 
tea-pot.  By  bending  up  a  little  as  you  sew  you  can 
make  a  basket. 

Picture-Frame  (Cardboard,  raffia,  thread  and  needle) 
Cut  a  circle  of  cardboard  5x5  inches  in  diam- 
eter. From  the  centre  cut  out  a  smaller  circle  three 
inches  in  diameter.  This  leaves  a  circular  cardboard 
frame.  Wind  this  round  and  round  smoothly  with 
the  raffia.  Paste  another  circle  on  the  back  to  give 
a  good  finish,  but  in  this  second  circle  cut  a  slit  up 
which  to  slide  the  photograph. 

Woven  Mat  (Loom,  raffia) 

Thread  a  little  loom  with  raffia  warp  as  de- 
scribed on  page  90.  Then  weave  the  woof  (also  of 
raffia)  back  and  forth  to  make  a  mat  or  a  case  for 
hanging  basket.  To  make  the  latter  the  right  size 
have  the  warp  threads  as  long  as  the  can  is  around 
the  circumference,  and  have  the  ividth  about  the  same 
as  the  height  of  the  can. 

The  raffia  can  be  colored  with  Diamond  dyes  and 
wee  rugs  made  for  the  doll-house  on  tiny  looms. 


Mother  Nature's  Horn  of  Plenty       47 
Grace  Hoops  (See  under  Plays  and  Games) 

LEAVES 

Festoons    and    Wreaths    (Leaves,    fresh    or   dried, 

thorns  or  needle  and  thread) 

City  children  may  need  to  be  told  what  seems  to 
be  handed  down  to  the  country  child  from  generation 
to  generation,  that  leaves  may  be  made  into  wreaths 
for  the  head  or  decoration  for  the  room  either  by 
overlapping  one  upon  another  and  fastening  together 
with  a  thorn  or  sharp  twig,  or  by  stringing  together 
on  a  stout  thread. 

To  Dry  or  Press  (Blotting  paper,  two  small  smooth 

boards,  strap,  wax  or  linseed  oil) 

Gather  and  press  pretty  autumn  leaves  thus : 
Have  ready  two  boards  measuring  about  one  by  two 
feet.  Put  the  leaves  between  sheets  of  blotting  paper 
and  place  these  between  the  boards  and  then  strap 
them  tightly  together,  or  if  no  straps  are  convenient, 
put  the  boards  beneath  a  heavy  weight  (a  book  will 
do).  Change  the  paper  every  day  or  so  till  sure  that 
they  are  quite  dry. 

To  preserve  and  brighten  the  colors  after  drying 
dip  in  melted  wax  and  press  a  moment  with  a  hot 
iron,  or  clear,  boiled  linseed  oil  will  do  in  place  of 
the  wax,  using,  however,  as  little  as  possible. 

Decoration  for  Curtains 

Pin  to  lace  curtains  in  attractive  arrangement. 

Transparency    (Leaves,  'bolting-cloth,   i  yard  white 

India  silk,  sezuing  silk,  needle) 

i.  Take  a  piece  of  bolting-cloth  twice  the  length 
of  the  largest  leaf  and  fold  over  evenly.  Open  again 


48  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

and  place  the  leaves  upon  the  bolting-cloth  artistically 
in  a  row;  fold  the  cloth  over  again  and  baste.  Bind 
the  edges  with  white  ribbon,  and  at  the  two  upper 
corners  sew  the  ends  of  a  narrow  ribbon  with  which 
to  suspend  the  transparency  in  the  window. 

2.  Or,  if  preferred,  sew  the  bolting-cloth  trans- 
parency as  a  border  to  the  end  of  a  yard  of  India 
silk  as  a  scarf  for  shelf  or  piano. 

Frieze  of  Leaves  (Leaves,  cartridge  or  other  strong 

paper  of  good  tone,  glue) 

A  pretty  frieze  for  a  room  can  be  made  by  past- 
ing leaves  on  a  long,  foot-high  strip  of  paper  which 
forms  a  background.  The  effect  will  depend  largely 
upon  the  harmony  between  the  color  of  the  leaves 
and  the  background,  as  well  as  upon  the  arrangement 
of  the  leaves.  They  may  be  arranged  in  an  irregular 
line,  or  may  be  placed  so  as  to  form  artistic  groups 
of  twos  and  threes  or  fours. 

Collections  of  Leaves 

When  the  collecting  instinct  is  upon  him,  let  the 
child  collect  and  classify  leaves  according  to  shape. 
See  if  he  can  tell  by  the  leaf  what  tree  it  came  from, 
and  if  he  recognizes  the  different  varieties  of  leaves. 

Four-Leaved  Clovers 

Look  for  four-leaved  clovers  when  on  your  coun- 
try walks,  and  save  to  press  and  afterwards  use  in 
writing  letters  of  good-will  as  decoration  for  paper, 
pasting  on  at  upper  left  hand  corner;  or  use  to  deco- 
rate place  cards  for  dinners.  It  will  hardly  be  neces- 
sary to  state  that  the  four-leaved  clover  has  for  long 
years  been  the  symbol  of  good-luck. 


Mother  Nature's  Horn  of  Plenty       49 
Shadow  Game  (See  under  Sun  and  Shadow) 

FEATHERS 

Feather  Flowers  (A  large  goose  with  many  white 

feathers,  beeswax,  spools  of  wire  of  different  sizes, 

aniline  dyes,  though  vegetable  dyes  are  preferable 

if  obtainable,  strong  scissors  suitable  for  cutting 

wire,  spools  of  strong  white  cotton  thread,  spool 

of  milliner's  green-covered  wire) 

Pluck  the  breast  of  the  goose.  (Feathers  come  out 

very  easily.)     The  feathers,  being  very  light,  fly  about 

and  therefore  it  is  best  to  do  the  plucking  in  an  uncar- 

peted  room  or  one  in  which  the  floor  has  been  covered 

with  a  large  sheet. 

Classify  the  feathers  according  to  size,  and  ar- 
range in  bundles  of  about  thirty  by  winding  a  stout 
thread  around  the  quills.  Thus  they  are  ready  for  the 
dyeing  process. 

Dye  according  to  directions  on  packages.  For 
deep  green  of  leaves  and  for  calyx  immerse  for  several 
minutes ;  for  more  delicate  tints  immersion  for  a 
second  is  sufficient. 

Suppose  we  select  for  our  first  effort  a  carnation. 
Choose  a  real  one  for  a  model.  Having  selected  about 
twenty  feathers  of  the  required  sizes  and  colors,  cut 
the  ends  to  resemble  the  form  of  the  petal  and  then 
pink  the  edge  as  in  the  real  flower.  The  actual  number 
of  petals  required  will  depend  upon  the  size  of  the 
flower  copied  and  must  be  left  to  the  judgment  of  the 
maker. 

Take  the  measure  of  the  length  of  stem  required 
on  the  wire  and  double  it  (wire  must  be  twice  as  long 
as  stem).  Wind  tightly  and  evenly  around  it  the 
green  milliner's  wire  to  make  the  stem. 


50   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Soften  the  beeswax  by  heating  slightly  in  a  pan 
till  soft  enough  to  mold  betwen  the  fingers.  Shape  it 
into  the  form  of  the  calyx,  inserting  the  stem  at  the 
lower  end,  and  pushing  it  far  enough  to  insure  firm- 
ness. Wrap  this  soft  calyx  form  round  with  green 
feathers  to  represent  the  flower  copied.  Upon  accu- 
racy at  the  beginning  depends  the  success  of  the  flower, 
therefore  it  is  necessary  to  observe  the  natural  one 
closely.  The  green  feathers  must  entirely  cover  the 
calyx  mold,  the  upper  ones  curving  back  a  little  as  in 
the  genuine  calyx. 

Take  some  colored  petals  and  insert  between  the 
calyx  and  the  wax  mold,  pushing  the  quill  end  of  the 
feather  firmly  into  the  wax.  Arrange  the  petals  spi- 
rally, beginning  at  the  bottom  and  building  gradually 
up  to  the  top.  The  larger  feathers  are  used  first,  grow- 
ing smaller  toward  the  top.  Complete  the  flower  by 
inserting  the  stamens  and  pistil,  which  are  made  by 
tearing  one  small  feather  into  narrow  strips  and  curl- 
ing these  by  drawing  once  over  a  scissors  blade. 

The  simplest  flowers  to  make  are :  Carnation 
pinks,  violets,  sweet  peas,  fuchsias,  roses  and  Easter 
lilies.  With  the  proper  amount  of  time,  patience  and 
perseverance,  any  flower  can  be  successfully  made. 

If  leaves  are  desired,  cut  green  feathers  into  the 
required  shape  and  attach. 

Indian  Headdress  (Large  turkey  feathers,  glue,  card- 
board, paint) 

Save  large  feathers  from  turkey  or  rooster  and 
make  Indian  headdress  by  glueing  upon  cardboard  cut 
to  proper  shape.  For  model  look  at  copper  cent. 


Mother  Nature's  Horn  of  Plenty       51 


FLOWERS 

Pressed  Morning-Glories  (The  flowers,  white  tissue- 
paper,  scissors,  book  or  pressing  boards) 
Press  the  flowers  between  a  fold  of  thin  tissue- 
paper.    The  delicate  flowers  will  adhere  to  the  paper, 
which  is  sufficiently  transparent  however  for  the  morn- 
ing-glory to  be  visible  through  it.    When  dry,  cut  the 
paper  from  around  the  flower  and  pin  to  curtains,  lam- 
brequin, etc.,  as  desired,  or  attach  to  letter  paper. 

Soldier-Flowers  (Milkweed  blossoms) 

The  small  blossoms  of  the  milkweed  may  be  made 
to  stand  in  rows  and  columns  like  soldiers,  two  by  two, 
four  by  four,  etc.,  giving  practice  in  counting. 

ROSE-HAWS 
Rosaries  (Haivs,  stout  thread,  needle) 

When  the  beautiful  red  rose-haws  ripen  let  the 
children  string  them,  making  rosaries  to  send  to  city 
friends. 

STRAWS 

Stringing  (Scissors,  needle,  thread,  cranberries,  nuts, 

etc.) 

Save  the  straw  from  rye  and  let  the  children  cut 
it  into  one-inch  lengths  for  stringing  alternately  with 
cranberries,  nuts,  beads,  etc.  Use  to  decorate  the  room, 
to  make  portieres,  and  to  decorate  the  child  himself 
when  dressing  up. 

Blowing  Bubbles  (Straw,  soapy  zvater) 

Hollow  straws  several  inches  long  may  be  used  to 
blow  tiny  bubbles  of  soapy  water  in  the  absence  of  a 
clay  pipe. 


52   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 


SUN  AND  SHADOW 

Blue-Prints  (Leaf,  blue-print  paper,  running  water, 

small  oblong  of  glass) 

A  package  of  blue-print  paper  can  be  bought  at 
any  photographic  supply  place  for  from  15  cents  up, 
or  can  be  had  in  the  sheet  from  an  architect's  supply 
store.  It  must  be  carefully  protected  from  the  light 
till  ready  for  use. 

Take  a  square  of  the  paper  and  place  upon  it  a 
leaf  or  flower  or  inconspicuous  weed  that  makes  a  good 
shadow  on  the  sidewalk  or  window  sill.  Place  this  in 
pleasing  position  upon  the  paper  and  put  quickly  in  the 
bright  sunshine,  holding  it  in  place  with  the  small 
pane  of  glass  (common  picture  glass  will  do).  Leave 
exposed  to  the  sun  for  about  ten  minutes,  then  pour 
cold  water  over  it  for  a  moment  or  so,  and  the 
"shadow"  will  be  seen  to  be  permanently  "fixed"  in 
light  blue  against  a  darker  blue  background. 

An  artist  acquaintance  has  a  hundred  or  more 
such  prints  of  leaves,  plants  and  flowers  beautifully 
mounted  in  a  Japanese  blank-book,  the  paper  of  which 
makes  an  exquisite  background.  She  finds  these 
shadows  of  the  flowers  and  commonest  weeds  sug- 
gestive in  her  designing. 

Shadow  Game   (Smooth  fence  in  sunshine;  branch 
with  leaves.) 

1.  Several   children    sit    in    row,    facing    smooth 
board  fence.     Another  group  of  children  form  their 
opponents.     Of  these  one  walks  behind   seated   row 
in   such   a  way  that  his  profile  is   visible  on   fence. 
Seated  children  guess  opponent  from  shadow  cast. 

2.  One    child    casts    on    wall    shadow    of    leafy 
branch.     Opponents  guess  name  of  parent  tree. 


CHAPTER  III 

SAVED  FROM  THE  SCRAP  BASKET 

or 
WORK  WITH  SCISSORS  AND  PASTE 

What  is  known  as  free-hand  cutting  has  been  for 
some  time  recognized  as  of  genuine  educational  value 
and  is  a  source  of  great  pleasure  to  the  child  when 
once  he  learns  his  capacity  in  this  direction.  When 
he  tries,  by  means  of  paper  and  scissors,  to  ex- 
press an  idea,  to  illustrate  some  story,  or  to  indicate 
something  that  he  has  seen,  his  notions  of  form  and 
proportion  become  more  definite  and  precise,  and  he 
learns  to  express  action  with  remarkable  skill  and 
power.  He  learns  to  appreciate  beauty  of  outline  as 
seen  in  mountains  and  trees  against  a  clear  sky,  and 
to  recognize  such  beauty  as  there  may  be  in  what 
artists  know  as  the  "sky  line,"  when  darkness  deep- 
ens and  the  mammoth  buildings  of  a  city  loom  up 
black  against  the  sunset  heavens.  The  definiteness  of 
observation  and  skill  with  the  hand  acquired  in  this 
free  cutting  serves  the  child  in  many  ways  when  in 
the  school  grades. 

Many  an  otherwise  useless  piece  of  paper  may, 
with  the  help  of  scissors,  give  the  child  hours  of 
pleasure. 

But  before  he  is  able  to  use  the  scissors  the 
child  may  receive  pleasure  and  benefit  from  the  use 
of  paper  alone. 

53 


54  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 


PAPER 

Tearing  Paper  (Any  bit  of  paper) 

Give  the  children  small  pieces  of  paper  and  let 
them  try  to  tear  these  into  simple  definite  shapes. 
Make  a  shoe,  stocking,  snowman,  tree,  ladder,  cat,  etc. 
Watch  that  they  do  not  grow  nervous  in  doing  it. 
After  a  little  practice  they  will  become  surprisingly 
expert.  Paste  what  they  make  on  a  good  background 
to  save  and  compare  with  later  efforts. 

This  is  a  really  educational  occupation  which  in- 
volves absolutely  no  expense,  as  any  clean  piece  of 
paper  may  be  so  used.  Will  employ  the  child  happily 
when  traveling. 

The  very  youngest  children,  if  they  want  to  tear 
the  newspaper,  may  be  asked  to  tear  it  into  tiny 
pieces  which  brother  and  sister  can  use  in  playing 
"hare  and  hounds." 

Cutting  Paper 

Let  the  child  begin  the  cutting  by  making  a  snow- 
ball out  of  white  paper,  and  then  a  snowman.  These 
need  only  crude  outlines,  such  as  are  within  his  ca- 
pacity. Then  lead  him  on,  little  by  little,  to  cut  a  pic- 
ture of  the  cat  and  of  the  dog,  and  illustrations  to  his 
favorite  stories,  as  the  "Three  Bears."  This  is  be- 
loved in  the  kindergarten,  requiring,  as  it  does,  pic- 
tures of  the  chairs,  the  bowls,  etc.  Those  who  have 
not  seen  children  do  this  kind  of  work  will  be  sur- 
prised at  the  capacity  developed. 

If  he  is  afraid  to  attempt  the  freehand  work,  give 
the  child  pictures  to  cut  around,  as  simple  outlines 
of  a  cat  seated,  or  a  piece  of  fruit.  Then  encourage 
him  to  cut  without  the  outline.  Both  efforts  may  run 


Saved  from  the  Scrap  Basket  55 

along  together.  If  a  line  be  drawn,  be  sure  that  it  is 
heavy  and  distinct  enough  to  be  readily  seen  and  fol- 
lowed. 

Birthday  Candles)  (Red  paper,  blank  card,  colored 
Firecrackers  }  crayon) 

Out  of  red  paper  let  the  child  cut  six  (or  any 
number  desired)  narrow  strips  for  red  candles,  to 
represent  birthday  candles.  Place  in  a  row  upon  a 
white  card,  to  serve  as  place  cards  at  a  child's  party. 
Draw  a  bit  of  yellow  at  end  of  each  candle  to  hint 
at  a  flame. 

The  same  may  be  turned  into  firecrackers  for  a 
"Fourth  of  July"  festival,  a  line  being  drawn  to  sug- 
gest a  fuse. 

Soldier-Caps  (Newspaper,  pins  or  paste) 

Take  brown  wrapping  paper  or  newspaper  and 
cut  a  square.  Place  before  you  and  fold  from  back 
to  front,  making  an  oblong.  While  still  folded  make 
another  fold  by  turning  the  left  edge  so  that  it  exactly 
meets  the  right  edge.  Open  this  much  out  and  there 
is  a  crease  running  from  top  to  bottom.  Now  take 
the  upper  left  hand  corner  and  make  it  touch  the  bct- 
tom  of  this  crease;  take  the  upper  right  hand  corner 
and  make  it  touch  the  lower  end  of  this  crease.  This 
gives  a  pointed  cap,  still  unfinished.  To  finish  cut  a 
slit,  an  inch  deep,  up  from  each  lower  end  of  the  cap 
and  then  fold  a  kind  of  hem  up  from  the  bottom  and 
paste  the  ends  over  neatly.  Turn  the  hat  over  and 
fold  a  similar  hem  on  the  other  side.  Turn  in  the 
corner  and  finish  by  pasting  neatly. 

Plume  for  Hat   (Paper  as  above,  scissors,  paste  or 
pin) 
Take  a  strip  of  paper  6  x  12  inches.     Make  a 


56   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

fringe  or  series  of  cuts  in  this  about  four  inches  long 
and  }/2  inch  wide,  and  then  roll  it  up  and  attach  to 
hat  with  paste  or  a  pin. 

Epaulets  for  shoulder  may  be  cut  in  similar  way. 

The  cutting  of  these  fringes  gives  practice  in  the 
use  of  scissors.  

The  articles  whose  making  we  will  now  describe 
do  not  come  under  the  head  of  free-hand  cutting,  as 
they  usually  require  cutting  according  to  measure- 
ment, and  really  definite  directions.  They  are  given 
in  general  in  the  order  of  difficulty  in  the  making. 

Chains  (Scissors,  paper,  paste,  toothpick) 

Let  the  little  child  begin  by  cutting  strips  of 
some  bright  paper  or  smooth  wrapping  paper  into 
lengths  of  ^  by  3  inches.  Make  a  ring  of  one  of  these, 
putting  a  wee  bit  of  paste  on  the  under  part  of  one 
end  and  sticking  it  fast  to  the  other  end  by  over- 
lapping. Through  this  ring  run  another  strip  and 
paste  into  a  similar  ring,  and  so  make  a  long  chain 
of  them  wherewith  to  decorate  the  child's  small  per- 
son or  the  room.  To  make  paste  see  page  169. 

It  is  well  to  have  a  small  pomade  box,  obtain- 
able at  a  druggist's,  in  which  to  keep  the  paste.  It 
can  then  be  covered  and  kept  moist  until  the  next 
time  for  using.  But  a  little  fresh  mucilage  or  paste 
can  at  any  time  be  put  into  a  butter  dish.  A  tooth- 
pick will  make  a  good  paste-stick,  which  the  child 
can  handle  more  easily  than  a  brush.  Show  him  that 
a  tiny  bit  of  paste  will  suffice  and  that  more  makes 
the  pretty  ring  mussy. 

If  mother  is  sewing  and  the  child  restless  and 
no  bright  colored  paper  convenient,  let  the  child  cut 


Saved  from  the  Scrap  Basket  57 

strips  of  newspaper  right  at  hand  and  make  the  rings. 
His  imagination  will  readily  convert  them  into  links 
of  gold. 

Mask  (Paper  of  any  color,  scissors,  chalk,  cord} 

Cut  an  oval  out  of  paper  (or  dress-lining)  and 
in  it  cut  holes  for  eyes,  nose,  and  mouth,  fitting  first 
to  the  child's  face  to"  insure  getting  them  in  the  right 
places.  Put  a  hole  in  the  middle  of  each  side  through 
which  to  tie  the  string  which  fastens  it  around  over 
the  head.  To  add  to  the  fun  the  mask  may  be  colored 
with  chalks. 

Newspaper    Wrappers    (Smooth    brown    wrapping 

paper,  pencil,  ruler) 

Take  smooth  pieces  of  brown  wrapping  paper. 
Cut  oblongs  8  x  12  inches.  From  one  narrow  edge 
then  measure  an  inch  down  on  each  side  and  make  a 
dot.  Make  another  dot  at  the  middle  of  this  same 
narrow  side.  Then  draw  a  curve  from  dot  to  dot 
and  cut  along  the  line.  This  makes  the  curved  edge 
of  the  wrapper.  The  curve  may  be  cut  free  hand  by 
a  skilful  hand,  or  drawn  with  a  compass.  Put  some 
mucilage  all  along  the  edge  of  the  curved  side  about 
*/2  inch  wide  and  let  dry.  Make  a  dozen  of  these  and 
give  to  father  for  a  present,  all  ready  for  use  when 
he  wants  to  mail  a  paper.  They  can  be  made  more 
complete  by  affixing  a  one-cent  stamp  on  the  right 
hand  side  where  the  curved  edge  begins. 

Papers   for   Baking   Pans    (Brown  paper,   scissors, 

pencil) 

Give  child  paper  and  baking-pans,  and  let  him 
cut  papers  ready  for  your  use  when  making  cake. 
Let  him  do  measuring. 


58   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Book-Mark    (Fine  ivhite   or   tinted  paper) 

Take  a  piece  of  dainty  paper  and  cut  into  an 
oblong  1x6  inches.  Fold  lengthwise  and  cut  a  small 
triangle  from  each  end  so  as  to  leave  a  point  when 
opened  out.  Now  cut  a  circle  in  the  middle  of  the 
paper  (which  is  still  folded)  and  cut  other  shaped 
openings,  diamonds,  triangles,  etc.,  along  the  fold, 
l/2  or  24  inches  apart.  Open  and  you  have  a  simple 
openwork  bookmark  the  little  child  can  give  father 
for  birthday.  A  little  experiment  will  show  how  to 
secure  variety  and  intricacy  of  design. 


Fringed  Bon-Bon  Papers  (White  tissue  paper,  col- 
ored ink  or  water-color  paints,  candy,  verse  of 
poetry) 

Cut  a  sheet  of  tissue  paper  into  little  oblongs 
4x5  inches.  Dip  each  narrow  end  Y^  of  an  inch 
into  ink,  red,  green,  etc.,  or  into  water-color  paints, 
and  let  dry.  Then  cut  this  colored  margin  into  nar- 
row slits,  making  fringe.  Copy  some  appropriate 
couplet  on  a  narrow  slip  of  paper  and  place  it  with 
a  piece  of  candy  inside  the  paper,  giving  the  fringed 
ends  a  final  twist.  The  making  of  these  at  home  for 
some  future  occasion,  such  as  a  birthday  party,  will 
afford  a  happy  hour's  amusement. 


Paper  Money  (White  paper,  pencil,  scissors,  cent) 

Place  the  cent  beneath  the  paper  and  then  press 
on  it  with  the  bottom  of  the  pencil,  rubbing  at  the 
same  time  with  a  circular  motion.  Soon  the  impres- 
sion of  the  coin  will  appear  on  the  paper.  Cut  out 
and  use  in  playing  store. 


Saved  from  the  Scrap  Basket  59 

Snowflakes  (White  paper,  mucilage,  a  ten-cent  box 
of  mica  crystals  or  five  cents'  worth  of  alum 
powder) 

A  six-pointed  star  must  first  be  made  of  white 
paper.  To  make  this  take  piece  of  the  paper  from  3 
to  6  inches  square,  according  to  the  size  of  the  star. 
Fold  the  paper  once  and  cut  an  approximate  half  cir- 
cle. Then  fold  this  in  thirds,  pressing  the  folds  to 
make  creases.  If  opened  out  the  circle  would  be 
marked  by  six  equi-distant  creases  radiating  from  the 
centre.  Do  not,  however,  open,  for  you  are  now  ready 
to  cut.  Before  doing  this,  observe  if  possible  some 
real  snowflakes,  with  miscroscope  or  magnifying  glass, 
or  even  with  the  naked  eye.  Notice  the  form  and 
hexagonal  structure.  This  is  seen  best  if  the  flake 
is  caught  on  some  woolen  fabric.  Then  look  into  an 
unabridged  dictionary  and  study  the  picture  of  the 
magnified  snowflake  crystal.  Then  cut  tiny  trian- 
gles, circles,  etc.,  into  your  folded  circle  so  that 
when  opened  out  it  will  suggest  an  enlarged  snow- 
flake  with  its  six  varied  points.  A  delicate  appear- 
ance is  secured  by  cutting  delicate  tapering  points, 
or,  if  the  points  be  broad,  cut  holes  in  them  to  give 
a  lacey  effect.  We  do  not  give  more  definite  direc- 
tions for  cutting,  as  the  great  fascination  of  the  occu- 
pation consists  in  the  experiments  with  their  many 
surprises. 

(1)  Now  take  the  paper  snowflake  and  brush  it 
lightly  over  with  a  thin,  transparent  mucilage,  and 
then  sift  over  it  some  mica  crystals  obtainable  at  a 
toy-store,  one  box  being  sufficient  for  many  flakes. 
After  drying,  cover  the  other  side  in  the  same  way. 
Suspended  from  the  Christmas  tree,  these  are  very 
effective. 

(2)  The  flakes  can  be  made  in  another  way, 


60  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

thus:  Make  a  solution  of  alum  water,  dissolving 
five  cents'  worth  of  alum  in  a  pint  of  water.  Be  sure 
it  is  all  dissolved.  Then  put  the  flakes  in  a  shallow 
dish  (granite  ware  or  some  material  that  the  acid  will 
not  injure).  Cover  with  the  solution  and  put  in  a 
place  slightly  warm,  so  that  the  gradual  evaporation 
of  the  water  will  help  in  the  slow  formation  of  the 
crystals.  When  finally  evaporated  the  lacey  "cut-out" 
will  be  found  covered  with  alum  crystals.  Cover 
during  evaporation  with  some  light  protection  from 
the  dust. 

Tailless  Kite  (Two  sticks,  $y2  feet  long  and  l/2  inch 

•wide,  a  ball  of  strong  but  thin  twine,  two  pieces 

tissue  paper,  knife,  flour  paste) 

Get  the  sticks  from  the  saw-mill.  Cut  a  notch 
in  the  two  ends  of  each  stick  as  a  catch  for  the  frame- 
work of  twine  which  will  be  put  on  later.  On  one 
stick  make  a  pencil  mark  about  seven  inches  from  the 
top.  Put  the  middle  of  the  second  stick  across  the 
first  at  this  mark  and  bind  the  two  together  firmly 
at  right  angles  to  each  other.  You  now  have  a 
skeleton  in  the  form  of  a  cross.  Number  the  ends  of 
the  sticks  I,  2,  3,  4,  making  the  top  I,  the  right  hand 
end  2,  the  bottom  3,  and  the  left  hand  4,  and  the 
place  where  they  join  5. 

Now  bend  the  second  stick  (the  cross  piece)  into 
a  bow  and  tie  a  piece  of  twine  from  end  to  end  like  a 
bow-string.  You  must  get  the  curve  of  the  bow  just 
right,  so  that  the  distance  from  the  middle  of  the 
bow-string  to  the  joinings  of  the  sticks  is  the  same 
as  from  the  joinings  of  the  sticks  to  the  top  of  the 
main  stick,  i.  e.,  seven  inches. 

Now  carry  twine  all  around,  from  end  to  end 
of  the  skeleton,  to  make  a  framework  for  the  paper; 


Saved  from  the  Scrap  Basket  61 

put  this  twine  through  each  notch  and  around  the  end 
of  the  stick  several  times  to  strengthen.  Now  paste 
together,  end  to  end,  lengthwise,  the  two  pieces  of 
paper,  to  make  one  long  piece  (a  single  piece  is  not 
large  enough).  Place  the  paper  on  the  floor  or  broad 
table,  and  lay  the  frame  upon  it.  The  paper  will  not 
be  as  long  or  wide  in  all  places  as  the  framework, 
hence,  fold  it  over  the  twine  framework  experi- 
mentally, and  cut  off  in  places  where  it  is  too  wide. 
Allow  enough  for  secure  pasting.  Use  the  cut-off 
corners  to  lengthen  in  other  places  where  necessary, 
by  pasting  on.  If  two  colors  of  paper  are  taken, 
the  effect  is  very  pretty,  the  corners  being  arranged 
to  match  each  other.  The  best  paste  is  made  by  a 
judicious  mixture  of  ordinary  flour  and  water. 

Now  the  belly-band  must  be  tied  on,  as  the  flying 
string  is  attached  to  the  belly-band.  The  belly-band 
is  attached  on  the  outside  or  convex  side  of  the 
kite,  being  attached  at  5  where  the  two  sticks  join ; 
and  at  3.  It  must  be  just  as  long  as  the  distance 
from  5  to  2  added  to  the  distance  from  2  to  3.  When 
tied  at  both  ends  put  your  pencil  through  the  loop  and 
move  it  so  that  the  pencil  rests  upon  the  figure  2. 
The  cord  will  then  make  an  angle  coinciding  with 
5-2  and  2-3.  At  the  angle  2,  attach  the  belly-band. 

In  flying  the  kite  it  is  important  to  have  a  very 
long  flying-string. 

CARDBOARD  OR  BRISTOL  BOARD 

Go-Bang  Board  (Bristol  board,  ruler,  ink,  pen,  but- 
ton-molds, water-color  paints  or  colored  inks) 
Get  a  piece  of  bristol  board  or  clean  cardboard  at 
stationer's  and  cut   it    18   inches   square.     Divide  by 
straight  lines  into  small  squares  ^  inches  each  way. 


62    Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

To  draw  the  straight  lines  in  ink  turn  the  ruler 
upside  down  and  run  the  penholder  against  the  edge, 
which  is  a  little  raised  from  the  paper.  This  keeps 
the  ink  from  blotting. 

Four  is  the  smallest  number  that  can  play  with 
much  success,  and  each  should  have  about  a  dozen 
counters.  These  can  be  made  of  the  smallest  sized 
button-molds,  each  set  of  12  painted  a  different  color, 
or  distinguished  by  a  ring  of  a  particular  color  drawn 
upon  its  upper  surface  with  ink  or  paint.  Small  flat 
buttons  may  also  be  used. 

To  win  the  game  each  player  must  succeed  in 
getting  a  certain  number  of  counters  (number  pre- 
viously agreed  upon),  say  four,  five  or  six,  in  a 
straight  row,  either  horizontally,  vertically  or  ob- 
liquely. If  he  gets  three  in  a  row,  then  the  next 
player  should  stop  this  opponent's  progress  at  one 
end  of  the  line  by  putting  one  of  his  own  men  there, 
and  must  depend  upon  his  neighbor  to  close  the  other 
end  of  the  line.  One  player  must  not  give  warning 
to  another  of  the  prospective  success  of  a  third.  Each 
must  keep  a  lookout  on  his  own  account. 

Checker-Board  (Bristol  board  or  any  stiff,  smooth 

cardboard,  smooth,  glased  paper  of  two  colors, 

red  and  black,  paste,  scissors,  ruler) 

Cut  from  the  cardboard  a  square  of  15  inches. 

Draw  a  line  parallel  to  each  side  one  inch  frcm  the 

edge  for  a  border.     From  each  colored  sheet  of  paper 

cut  32  squares  of  1^4  inches  each.     Paste  eight  of 

these  in  a  row,  alternating  colors,  and  arranging  so 

that  they  just  touch  the  top  border  line.     Make  eight 

such  rows,  one  beneath  the  other,  and  finally  giving 

64  squares. 

For  checkers,  button-molds  of  small  size  may  be 


Saved  from  the  Scrap  Basket  63 

used.  Twelve  will  be  needed  of  one  color  and  twelve 
of  another.  Paint  these  with  water-colors.  Flat 
porcelain  buttons  may  also  be  used. 

Toy   Screen    (Tinted   cardboard,   punch,  worsted  or 

ribbon,  4  small  pictures} 

Cut  four  pieces  of  pale  blue  Bristol  board  3x4 
inches.  Punch  two  holes  in  the  two  long  sides  of 
two  of  these,  and  in  one  side  of  each  of  the  remaining 
ones.  Tie  the  four  panels  together  with  the  ribbon 
or  worsted  so  as  to  make  a  tiny  screen,  first  pasting 
on  each  panel  a  miniature  picture  of  a  Madonna  and 
Child  or  some  other  similar  subject.  Suitable  for 
child  to  give  as  Christmas  gift.  Must  be  done  neatly. 

Fan  (Bristol  board,  pencil,  worsted,  two  slats,  scrap 

picture] 

Cut  two  pieces  of  tinted  Bristol  board  into  ovals, 
6^4  x  8  inches.  Make  a  series  of  pencil  dots  54  inch 
from  edge  of  oval  and  one  inch  apart.  Through 
these,  holding  the  ovals  together,  punch  holes.  Sew 
together  with  worsted,  using  the  overhand  stitch. 
Having  gone  around  once,  if  cross-stitch  effect  is 
desired,  go  around  again  the  other  way,  going  thus 
through  each  hole  a  second  time.  For  handles  take 
two  long  slats  and  glue  on  to  each  side  of  the  fan 
from  the  centre  down  to  the  point  of  the  oval,  and 
beyond.  Paste  a  pretty  scrap  picture  over  the  centre 
to  finish  off.  Tie  the  worsted  around  the  ends  of 
slats  in  a  pretty  knot  to  hold  them  together.  Baby 
ribbon  may  be  used  instead  of  worsted. 

Cardboard  Animals  (Glue,  blocks  or  spools,  picture- 
books,   cardboard,   tissue  paper} 
Find  models  in  picture-books,  or  get  from  But- 


64   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

terick  Fashion  Co.  their  animal  pictures,  or  same  may 
be  had  from  kindergarten  supply  stores.  Trace  out- 
line upon  tissue  paper,  using  soft  pencil.  Turn  paper 
over  on  cardboard  and  trace  firmly  again  around  the 
outline.  This  leaves  impression  of  picture.  Cut  it 
out  and  glue  it  to  block  or  spool,  or  attach  a  card- 
board brace  to  one  side  to  make  stand. 

Candlesticks  (Squares  of  bright  tissue  paper,  Bristol 

board,  rubber  bands} 

Cut  circle  of  stiff  cardboard  5  inches  in  diameter. 
Draw  upon  it  two  diameters  at  right  angles  to  each 
other.  From  the  centre  cut  along  each  of  these  diam- 
eters for  a  little  less  than  half  an  inch.  Bend  up  the 
corners  thus  made  and  insert  a  candle. 

Cut  pieces  of  tissue  paper  12  inches  square;  place 
the  circle  holding  the  candle  upon  the  tissue  paper, 
fold  the  latter  around  the  circle  and  the  candle,  and 
put  a  rubber  band  around  to  hold  in  place.  The  ap- 
pearance is  improved  if  two  colors  of  tissue  paper  be 
used.  The  effect  up  and  down  a  table  of  these  simple 
candlesticks  is  most  festive.  Colors  may  be  changed 
to  suit  special  occasions. 

Chinese  Toy  (Three  thin  pieces  of  cardboard  2  x  2}/2 
inches  in  measurement  [visiting  cards  will  do], 
6  lengths  of  taffeta  binding  or  baby  ribbon,  l/\ 
inch  wide  x  3  inches  long) 

The  following  toy  can  be  made  with  little  ex- 
pense and  very  little  trouble  if  directions  are  followed 
explicitly.  It  may  be  well  to  have  an  older  child  read 
each  statement  as  the  less  experienced  one  tries  to 
follow.  A  child  who  enjoys  attempting  things  that 
are  a  little  difficult  will  enjoy  working  this  out. 


Saved  from  the  Scrap  Basket 


Place  the  three  cards  one  beneath  the  other,  nar- 
row sides  facing  each  other. 

Letter  the  cards  respectively  A, 
B,C. 

As  they  lie  on  the  table,  write  on 
upper  side  of  each  card  "right,"  and 
on  the  under  side  write  "wrong." 

Then  place  each  card  so  that  the 
"right"  side  is  up. 

Take  card  A  and  on  right  side 
at  middle  of  top  place  figure  I  and  at 
each  lower  corner  place  a  figure  2. 

Do  the  same  with  Card  B. 

Turn  B  card  over  and  on  wrong 
side  of  B  put  figure  3  at  each  upper 
corner  and  figure  4  at  middle  of 
lower  edge. 

Do  same  with  card  C  on  wrong 
side. 

Now  we  are  ready  to  unite  the 
cards  by  the  ribbons. 

Take  one  strip  of  ribbon  and 
paste  one  end  on  right  side  of  card  A 
at  figure  i.  Run  it  beneath  the  card 
and  bring  it  out  so  as  to  paste  the 
other  end  on  the  right  side  of  card  B 
at  figure  I. 

Take  two  strips.  Paste  one  end 
of  each  at  2  on  card  A.  Run  beneath 
card  B  and  turn  up  over  so  as  to 
paste  on  figure  2  of  card  B. 

A  and  B  are  thus  loosely  united 


Chinese  Toy. 


and  the  toy  may  be  considered  finished,  but  it  is  more 
mysterious  if  made  longer,  as  follows : 

Turn  over  and  at  each  figure  3  on  card  B  paste 


66   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

the  ends  of  two  strips  of  ribbon.  (As  ribbons  already 
placed  are  loose  this  can  be  readily  done.) 

Run  beneath  B  and  bring  up  so  as  to  paste  the 
ends  on  each  figure  3  of  card  C. 

Take  another  strip.  Paste  the  end  on  4  of  card 
B.  Run  ribbon  beneath  card  C  and  turn  up  so  as  to 
paste  on  figure  4  of  card  C. 

This  completes  set  of  three.  Others  can  be  added 
ad  infinitum  by  ingenious  children. 

To  operate  (if  the  word  be  not  too  pretentious 
a  one  in  this  connection)  take  hold  of  one  of  the 
cards  at  either  end  and  keep  turning  it  up  and  down 
so  that  first  one  narrow  edge  and  then  the  other  is 
uppermost.  The  remaining  cards  should  fall  in  a 
continuous  cascade. 

The  rough  sides  may  be  finished  by  pasting  on 
each  a  pretty  paper  lining  cut  just  to  fit.  (See  illus- 
tration.) 

MISCELLANEOUS 

Chinese  Kite  (Kindergarten  slats,  paper,  glue} 

Take  a  firm,  light  paper  (druggist's  paper  will 
do).  Cut  two  oblongs,  7  x  10  inches.  Cut  off  all  the 
corners  by  an  oblique  line  of  three  inches.  Fold  each 
oblong  lengthwise.  Place  the  folded  edges  back  to 
back,  still  folded.  Take  two  slats  and  place  one 
under  one  oblong  and  over  the  other,  horizontally. 
Do  the  same  with  the  other  slat,  but  reversing  the 
under  and  over  positions.  Take  four  strips  of  paper, 
which  should  be  about  one  inch  wide.  Paste  two  strips 
over  the  splints,  one  on  each  side,  to  hold  them  in 
place.  Place  a  third  strip  from  top  to  bottom  of  the 
folded  oblongs  to  hold  them  together.  (They  mean- 
while lying  back  to  back.)  Turn  the  oblongs  over 


Saved  from  the  Scrap  Basket  67 

and  place  the  remaining  strip  in  corresponding  posi- 
tion. The  result  is  a  four-winged  kite.  Tie  a  cord 
around  the  slats  and  it  is  finished. 


Ash-Tray  (Cigar  bands,  glass  saucer,  photographer's 

paste,  square  of  felt) 

For  some  time  past  children  who  are  under  the 
sway  of  the  collecting  instinct  have  acquired  from 
friends  or  by  purchase  the  bright  colored  bands  that 
come  around  cigars  and  then  have  utilized  them  thus: 
Make  an  ash  receiver  by  getting  at  a  stationer's  a 
glass  dish  and  its  accompanying  piece  of  felt.  Paste 
bands  in  pleasing  positions  upon  the  under  side  of 
the  glass.  (Photographer's  paste  shows  no  discolor- 
ation.) Meanwhile,  the  felt  should  have  been  thor- 
oughly wet,  stretched  to  fit  the  under  side  of  the 
dish,  and  hung  up  to  dry.  When  dry,  paste  upon  the 
under  side  of  the  dish  and  trim  off  neatly  the  pro- 
jecting corners. 


Pen-Tray    (Materials  same   as   above,    except    that 

stamps  or  embossed  letter-heads  arc  substituted 

for  cigar  bands) 

There  are  many  who  do  not  wish  to  encourage 
smoking,  and  to  such  we  suggest  a  pleasing  modifi- 
cation of  the  above. 

Buy  the  glass  dish  and  felt  above  mentioned,  and 
instead  of  the  bands  paste  upon  the  dish  canceled 
postage  stamps  or  letter-head  monograms,  etc.,  for  a 
pen-tray.  A  smooth  glass  saucer  and  any  piece  of 
bright-colored  felt  that  may  be  in  the  house  may  of 
course  be  used. 


68  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Scrap-Book  (Colored  paper-muslin,  heavy  sezving  silk 

or  worsted,  paste,  paste-stick) 

Cut  paper-muslin  of  pretty  colors,  pink,  blue  or 
tan,  into  pieces  8  x  13  inches  (six  pieces  in  all). 
Fold  each  one  over  once  and  fit  together  to  make  a 
book,  the  cover  being  of  a  color  different  from  the 
body  of  the  book.  Sew  all  together  by  overcasting 
the  back  with  stitches  */2  inch  apart  in  one  direction, 
and  then  going  back  in  the  opposite  direction  through 
the  same  holes,  thus  securing  a  cross-stitch  effect. 
Show  the  child  how  to  paste  scrap-pictures  neatly  in 
this  book.  He  may  keep  it  for  himself  or  give  it  to 
the  children's  ward  in  a  hospital  or  to  some  younger 
friend.  A  very  little  paste  or  glue  will  suffice ;  a  bit 
in  the  centre  and  towards  the  corners  of  a  picture. 

If  the  child  has  collected  a  large  assortment  of 
cards  before  beginning  to  make  the  book,  let  him 
classify  them,  putting  together  on  one  page  animals, 
on  another  plants,  on  another  pictures  typical  of  the 
different  seasons,  etc.  He  may  in  this  way  suggest 
a  house,  putting  on  one  page  kitchen  furniture  ar- 
ranged in  some  logical  order;  on  another  page  the 
furnishings  of  bedroom,  etc.  Pictures  for  this  pur- 
pose may  be  cut  from  magazine  advertisements,  trade 
journals,  etc.  In  the  same  fashion  a  store  may  be 
furnished  with  articles  for  sale,  the  counter,  scales, 
and  desk.  This  gives  practice  in  selecting  and 
arranging.  Good  taste  may  be  inculcated  even  from 
such  small  beginnings. 


CHAPTER  IV 

THE  SEWING-BASKET 

While  busy  with  thread  and  needle,  the  mother 
may  find  it  necessary  to  suggest  some  happy  employ- 
ment for  the  little  one  who  asks  for  something  to  do. 
What  do  the  contents  of  the  sewing-basket  hint? 

BUTTONS 

Spinning  Button  (Button,  thread) 

Show  the  child  a  button  strung  upon  a  strong 
thread  about  12  inches  long.  Then  hold  the  thread 
firmly  between  thumb  and  finger  of  each  hand  and 
twirl  it  rapidly,  drawing  it  suddenly  taut.  The  but- 
ton whirls  round,  making  a  pretty  spinning  figure. 

Stringing  Buttons  (Buttons,  waxed  thread) 

If  baby  is  so  old  that  he  is  not  tempted  to  swal- 
low a  pretty  button,  give  him  a  strong  thread  waxed 
at  the  end  to  make  it  stiff,  and  let  him  make  a  chain 
of  buttons.  They  may  be  strung  according  to  size  or 
color  or  shape,  giving  practice  in  counting,  in  arrange- 
ment, and  in  choice. 

Buttons  as  Counters  (Buttons) 

Save  disused  buttons  of  the  same  kind  and  let 
the  child  classify  into  two  or  more  sets  to  be  used  as 
counters  in  games  like  checkers  or  go-bang.  See 
page  62. 

69 


70   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Button-Mold    Wheels    (Molds,    brush,    water-color 

paints) 

Give  the  child  four  wooden  button-molds  of  the 
same  size  and  let  him  paint  spokes  upon  them  so  that 
they  will  be  ready  any  time  to  use  as  wheels  for  a 
toy  wagon.  Call  him  a  little  wheelwright. 

Button-Mold  Tops  (Molds,  match  or  toothpick,  gild- 
ing or  paint) 
Paint  or  gild  a  button-mold  and  then  stick  through 

the  hole  a  toothpick  or  burnt  match  whittled  to  right 

size  and  show  the  child  how  to  spin  it. 

Button-Mold  Counters  (See  page  62) 


SPOOLS 
Toy  Furniture  (See  page  15) 

Toy  Tree  Boxes  (Spools,  green  paint,  matches,  green 

paper,  scissors,  paste) 

Let  the  child  paint  an  empty  spool  green,  to  be 
used  as  a  tree  box.  Insert  a  burnt  match  to  which 
has  been  pasted  some  green  paper,  previously  fringed, 
to  represent  foliage.  The  child  can  make  a  row  of 
such  trees  as  a  little  boulevard  up  which  he  can  draw 
an  empty  match  box  for  a  carriage. 

Spool  Tower  Target  (A  number  of  spools,  ball) 

Pile  a  number  of  spools  one  on  top  of  another 
and  let  the  child  try  to  knock  them  down  with  his 
ball. 


The  Sewing- Basket  71 

Toy  Road  Roller   (Spool,  cord,  toy  horse) 

Tie  a  cord  through  a  spool  and  hitch  it  as  a  road 
roller  to  the  Noah's  Ark  horse. 

Pulley  Elevator  (Narrow  cardboard  box,  such  as  a 

corset  box  or  shorter  one,  spool,  cord,  another 

small  box,  either  saved  or  made,  narrow  enough 

to  fit  inside  the  larger  one,  skezver) 

Stand  the  large  box  on  its  narrow  end  and  near 

the  top  punch  a  hole  on  each  side  so  that  the  holes  are 

opposite  to  each  other.    Take  a  spool  and  run  through 

it  an  axle  made  of  a  slender  piece  of  wood  like  a 

skewer.     Then  put  the  ends  of  the  axle  in  the  holes 

in  the  box.     This  makes  the  pulley.    Use  the  smaller 

box  as  an  elevator.     Tie  a  string  to  this  little  box  in 

such  a  way  that  you  can  hold  it  up  evenly.    To  do  this 

you  must  punch  a  hole  in  each  of  the  opposite  sides. 

Then  tie  one  end  of  a  longer  string  to  the  middle  of 

the  first  named,  and  put  the  other  end  over  the  pulley. 

Revolve  the  spool  by  pulling  one  end  of  the  string 

and  the  box  will  be  raised. 

Matching  Colors  (Spools  of  silk  or  cotton  of  various 
colors,  silk  and  cotton  fabrics  of  different  colors) 
Have  a  color  game,  asking  the  child  to  try  to 
match  the  colors  on  the  spools  with  those  in  the  fab- 
rics. 

NEEDLES 

Breastpins  (Broken  needles,  sealing  wax,  candle) 

Take  a  large  broken  needle,  such  that  it  is  intact 
except  for  the  eye.  Show  the  child  how  to  make  a 
pretty  pin  for  dolly  by  melting  the  wax  a  little  in 
the  candle  flame,  inserting  the  head  of  the  needle,  and 
molding  into  shape  the  bit  of  wax  that  adheres. 


72   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Threading  Needles  (Needles,  thread) 

If  eager  to  do  something,  give  the  child  a  num- 
ber of  needles  with  thread  of  white  and  black,  and 
let  him  thread  them  and  put  them  into  a  cushion  so 
that  they  will  be  all  ready  for  your  use  some  morning 
when  you  are  in  a  hurry  to  sew  on  a  button  or  take 
a  stitch  in  Tommy's  little  shirt. 

MISCELLANEOUS 
Thimble  Biscuits  (See  page  104) 

Drawing  Scissors   (Scissors,  paper,  pencil) 

Give  the  child  scissors  and  paper  and  let  him 
place  the  scissors  on  the  paper  and  draw  the  outline 
around  them.  Then  tell  him  to  cut  out  this  outline. 
Make  several  such  and  play  at  keeping  cutlery  store. 
Draw  scissors  open  at  different  angles  and  tell  names 
of  angles ;  right,  acute,  obtuse. 

Guessing  Distances  (Ruler  or  tape  measure) 

Let  the  children  guess  the  height  and  length  of 
various  objects  in  the  room.  Verify  by  measuring 
with  the  tape-measure.  Tell  them  of  Oliver  Wendell 
Holmes,  the  great  poet,  who,  whenever  he  drove  into 
the  country,  carried  a  tape-measure  with  which  to 
determine  the  girth  of  any  large  tree  he  saw. 

Let  children  measure  the  size  of  the  panes  of 
glass,  window-frames,  etc. ;  have  them  tell  how  many 
feet  it  would  take  to  carpet  the  floor. 

Tell  them  to  put  father's  hat  on  the  floor,  near 
the  wall,  and  guess  its  height. 

Such  little  exercises  develop  the  powers  of  accu- 
rate observation  in  a  way  that  may  prove  very  helpful 
in  an  emergency. 


CHAPTER  V 

THE  PAINT  BOX 

or 
EXPRESSION  WITH  PENCIL  OR  BRUSH 

Let  the  child  early  be  given  charcoal  or  colored 
chalks,  and  later  the  three  pigments — red,  blue  and 
yellow — wherewith  to  express  his  ideas.  Allow  him 
some  choice  in  the  medium  he  uses — as  pencil, 
charcoal  or  brush — as  one  may  be  best  suited  to  his 
purpose  one  time,  and  another  one  at  another  time. 

Encourage  the  child  to  tell  a  story  by  painting 
or  drawing.  The  earliest  graphic  method  by  which 
man  conveyed  messages  to  one  at  a  distance  was 
through  picture-writing. 


LEARNING  TO   OBSERVE 

Painting  From  the  Real  Object   (Paints,  chalk  or 

charcoal) 

Place  before  the  child  an  apple,  banana  or  flower 
of  simple  form  and  let  him  copy  directly  from  the 
object  without  previous  drawing.  Encourage  his  ef- 
forts, however  crude  the  results  at  first.  It  is  more 
educative  to  draw  from  the  real  object  than  from  a 
copy.  Give  him  at  first  three  colors  only,  in  paints, 
till  he  learns  how  to  get  other  colors  by  mixing  these. 
73 


74   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

For  this  purpose  point  out  beautiful  sunsets  and  cloud 
effects  in  Nature. 

Life  Stages  of  Seedling  (Paper,  paints,  seedling) 

Place  before  the  child  a  bean  or  pea.  Give  him 
an  oblong  of  paper  3x8  inches.  Fold  it  into  four 
parts.  In  the  first  let  him  draw  or  paint  the  seed  as 
he  sees  it.  Then  let  him  plant  the  seed.  In  a  day 
or  so  let  him  paint  a  picture  of  the  seedling,  after 
having  grown  so  as  to  show  the  development  of  the 
seed  leaves.  Draw  two  other  pictures  to  show  later 
stages  of  growth.  This  gives  a  picture  history  of 
the  little  plant  and  while  so  occupied  the  child  is  learn- 
ing to  observe  and  note  that  which  he  sees. 

ACQUIRING  SKILL 

Calendars  (Water-colors,  brush,  paper,  calendar  pad) 
Draw  circles,  squares,  etc.,  and  let  the  child  fill  in 
the  outlines  with  color.  A  tiny  calendar  may  be 
pasted  in  the  center  and  ribbons  put  through  where- 
with to  hang  it  up. 

In  filling  in  these  figures  show  the  child  how  to 
hold  the  brush  lightly  so  as  to  secure  freedom  of 
stroke.  Let  him  make  long  strokes  beginning  at  the 
top  of  the  paper  and  moving  from  side  to  side  slowly 
downward,  or  rather  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent  with 
neatness.  Have  enough  water  on  the  brush  so  that 
the  color  will  not  dry  from  one  long  stroke  before 
you  are  able  to  go  back  and  carry  it  on  to  the  next 
stroke.  Practice  making  a  clean,  smooth  surface. 

Nature  Pictures 

Let  the  child  fill  one  sheet  thus  with  blue,  a  pic- 
ture of  the  sky.  Another  sheet  may  be  covered  with 


The  Paint  Box  75 

green,  a  meadow.     Still  another  sheet  may  have  the 
upper  part  blue  and  the  lower  green. 


EXPERIMENTS  WITH  COLOR 

Prism  (Secure  glass  prism  from  kindergarten  store 
or  from  some  candelabra  you  may  have  at  home) 
Place   in   sunlight   and   let  child   observe   colors 
and  the  order  in  which  they  appear ;  always  in  the  same 
order — the  cold  colors  at  one  end,  the  warm  ones  at 
the  other.     Let  the  little  child  try  to  catch  and  hold 
the  lovely  "light-bird." 

Pigments  (Water-color  paints,  glasses  of  water) 

Dissolve  a  little  red,  yellow  and  blue  paint  in 
three  separate  glasses.  Then,  by  mingling  these — the 
primary  colors — show  how  the  secondary  colors — or- 
ange, green  and  violet — may  be  obtained. 

Transparent  Papers 

Get  at  a  kindergarten  store  the  transparent 
papers  and  isinglass  used  in  color  work.  By  overlap- 
ping one  upon  another  different  hues  may  be  ob- 
tained. This  may  be  done  also,  though  less  effect- 
ively, with  colored  tissue  papers ;  but  these  are  not 
so  pure  in  tone. 

Color-Top 

Color  tops  may  be  procured  at  kindergarten  stores. 
With  the  top  come  paper  circles,  of  standard  colors, 
with  their  tints  and  shades,  giving  a  great  variety. 
These  are  so  slit  that  by  placing  two  or  more  on  the 
top  according  to  directions  and  revolving  the  top,  any 
tint  or  hue  may  be  mathematically  produced. 


76   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

If  the  child  has  made  his  own  button-mold  top, 
let  him  cut  circles  of  white  paper  and  slip  them  over 
the  axis  of  the  top.  Make  a  dab  of  color  here  or 
there  on  the  paper  with  paint  or  chalk.  Whirl 
around  and  observe  the  effect.  This  will  lead  up  to 
a  better  understanding  of  the  above-mentioned  color- 
top  which  is  manufactured  by  the  Milton  Bradley  Co. 

APPLIED   ART 

Toy  Wagons  and  Houses 

If  the  child  has  made  wagons  or  houses  of  wood 
or  cardboard,  let  him  paint  them  in  broad,  free  strokes. 
It  is  desirable  that  the  little  child  be  given  work 
which  involves  the  free  movement  of  the  larger  mus- 
cles which  such  work  demands.  This  may  not  appeal 
to  one  as  belonging  under  the  head  of  art,  but  we 
learn  from  Mr.  Pennell  that  in  Sicily  the  wagons  of 
the  peasants  are  beautifully  decorated  with  landscapes 
and  other  pictures,  and  that  the  artists  are  particular 
to  make  their  names  conspicuous. 

In  any  case  a  certain  artistic  feeling  is  required 
in  choosing  the  colors  and  rightly  applying  them  even 
in  house-painting  and  wagon  decoration.  And  mean- 
while the  child  is  learning  how  to  wield  his  instru- 
ments. 

Place  Cards 

Take  a  clover  leaf  and  practice  painting  from  it 
until  able  to  make  a  copy  good  enough  to  paint  upon 
a  place  card  for  the  table.  If  the  drawing  be  cor- 
rect, just  a  flat  wash  of  color  will  do  for  the  painting 
at  first. 

An  autumn  leaf  will  do  for  a  Thanksgiving  card. 

See  Festival  Occasions  for  other  ideas. 


The  Paint  Box  77 

Tops 

If  a  button-mold  top  has  been  made,  it  may  be 
painted  in  concentric  rings  or  the  entire  surface  may 
be  neatly  colored. 

Match-Safe 

This  has  been  described  upon  page  34. 

Designs  for  Rugs  (Paper,  brown  or  white,  paints  or 

chalk) 

Let  child  draw  or  paint  design  for  toy  rug  he 
is  making-  for  doll-house.  He  may  make  an  oblong 
of  one  color,  and  at  each  end  draw  lines  across,  which 
are  to  be  woven  in  another  color.  There  may  be 
one  line  at  each  end,  or  two,  or  three,  etc.  The  ar- 
rangement of  these  lines  and  their  distance  apart  allow 
much  scope  for  taste  and  judgment. 

Designs  for  Wall-Papers,  Oilcloths,  Etc.    (Parquetry 
papers,  paste,  etc.) 

1.  Have  child  observe  oilcloth  designs  and  then 
with  kindergarten  parquetry  papers  try  to  make  sim- 
ilar ones  for  doll-house. 

2.  Having   made    pasted    designs,    let   him   copy 
same  in  water-colors. 

Design   for   Stained   Glass   Window    (Transparent 

paper,  scissors,  white  paper,  paste} 

Cut  a  circle  out  of  the  white  paper.  Fold  it  once, 
which  gives  a  half-circle;  fold  again,  which  gives  a 
quarter-circle.  Holding  it  folded,  cut  several  ellipses, 
triangles,  etc.,  into  the  folded  edges.  Open  out  and 
you  have  framework  of  a  rose-window.  On  the  back 
of  this  paste  a  piece  of  transparent  paper  (see  page 
75),  red  or  green  or  yellow,  and  let  the  light  shine 


78   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

through.  Hang  in  window  for  transparency.  Suitable 
for  Easter  gift.  Vary  by  cutting  like  cathedral  win- 
dows. (See  illustrations  in  dictionary  under  "Trac- 
ery.") 

PICTURE-STORY 

Chased  by  a  Goose  (Pencil,  paper) 

Once  some  boys  lived  in  a  house  (make  a  dot) 
surrounded  by  a  strong  fence  (draw  circle  round  the 
dot).  A  short  distance  off  was  a  large  pond  (an  oval, 


Chased  by  a  Goose 

a  little  below  and  to  the  right  of  the  circle).  One 
day  the  boys  ran  down  to  the  pond  (draw  curved 
line  from  house  to  pond)  and  began  to  splash  in  the 
water  and  to  throw  it  at  each  other  (a  number  of 
oblique  lines  from  right  hand  end  of  pond).  Some 
distance  off  lived  some  Indians  in  two  wigwams  (two 
oblique  lines  meeting  at  the  top  and  next  to  them  a 
similar  pair,  like  two  tents,  just  below  the  pond). 
When  the  Indians  saw  the  boys  throwing  the  water 


The  Paint  Box  79 

out  they  began  to  chase  the  boys,  running  up  a  zigzag 
path  (from  each  tent  draw  an  oblique  line  to  the  right 
for  a  short  distance  and  then  turn  to  the  left  till  it 
meets  the  pond).  The  boys  ran  as  fast  as  they  could 
up  a  winding  path  parallel  to  the  one  they  ran  down 
(draw  curving  line  parallel  to  first  one),  and  then  ran 
to  the  left  partly  around  the  fence  surrounding  the 
house.  They  had  to  run  around  the  barn,  too  (an 
oblique  line  to  the  left  and  then  another  to  the 
right  till  it  meets  the  circle  again),  and  when  they 
looked  behind  them  they  found  they  had  been  chased 
by  a  goose ! ! ! 

A  little  practice  will  make  this  easy  for  the  story 
teller.  The  original  dot  and  circle  form  the  head  and 
eye  of  the  goose.  The  curving  path  is  the  neck.  The 
water  splashing  out  makes  the  tail  feathers.  The 
wigwams  and  the  zigzag  path  form  the  legs  and  feet, 
and  the  path  around  the  barn  makes  the  bill. 


CHAPTER  VI 

DOLLS  AND  DOLL-HOUSES 

What  little  girl  does  not  love  a  doll?  The  more 
variety  in  their  size  and  style  the  better  pleased  is 
she.  Below  are  a  number  of  suggestions  for  simple 
home-made  dollies  that  may  be  prepared  as  a  birthday 
or  other  surprise  by  older  brothers  or  sisters. 

A  FEW  DOLLS 
x.  Clay-Pipe  Doll 

Ink  in  the  eyes,  nose  and  mouth  on  the  back  of 
the  bowl  of  a  pipe;  dress  in  calico  gown  and  apron, 
and  put  on  a  sunbonnet  to  conceal  the  top  of  the 
pipe. 

2.  Clothespin  Doll 

Ink  features  upon  the  head  of  the  clothespin  and 
clothe  as  either  boy  or  girl. 

3.  Wishbone  Doll  (Wishbone,  sealing-iva*.  material 

for  trousers) 

Clothe  the  two  limbs  in  trousers  and  ink  in  the 
features  upon  the  flat  joining  bone.  Feet  may  be  made 
of  sealing  wax  melted,  pressed  into  shape  and  at- 
tached while  still  warm. 

4.  Peanut   Doll    (Peanuts,  seii'ing-silk.   glue,   thread 

and  needle,  silk  for  dress) 


Dolls  and  Doll-Houses  81 

Make  into  Chinese  doll.  Take  one  peanut  and  ink 
in  the  features,  making  the  eyes  slanting.  Glue  on 
a  queue  of  braided  silk.  String  together  several  pea- 
nuts to  make  the  body.  To  the  upper  one  add  on 
each  side  one  or  two  as  arms  and  string  several  to- 
gether to  make  legs.  Dress  in  wide-sleeved  jacket 
and  wide-legged  trousers  of  Oriental  design. 

5.  Yarn  Doll  (Skein  of  white  cotton  yam) 

Cut  the  skein  into  lengths  of  12  inches.  Double 
the  skein  over  in  the  middle  and  tie  a  string  tight 
around  about  two  inches  from  the  top,  forming  a  neck 
and  so  making  the  head.  Tie  another  string  further 
down  for  a  waist  line,  but  leave  out  a  few  threads  on 
each  side,  of  which  to  make  two  arms.  Tie  these 
near  the  ends  to  indicate  wrists.  Before  tying  the 
wrists  cut  the  threads  to  right  lengths  for  arms.  The 
features  may  be  put  in  with  ink. 

6.  Cork  Doll  (id  or  more  corks  saved  from  olive  bot- 

tles, etc.,  smooth  wire  or  hairpins — three  in  num- 
ber) 

String  several  corks  upon  the  wire  or  hairpin  for 
head  and  body.  Through  the  second  cork  from  the  top 
run  a  hairpin  sideways  for  arms,  and  fasten  two  corks 
upon  each  projecting  end,  cutting  off  any  of  the  wire 
that  may  extend  beyond  the  cork.  Through  the  lower 
cork  of  the  body  run  another  hairpin  and  fasten  two 
corks  upon  it  for  legs.  Turn  the  end  corks  sideways 
to  suggest  feet.  Dress  the  doll  as  desired. 

7.  Paper  Doll  (Fashion  papers  and  catalogues,  scis- 

sors, paint,  paste) 

Most  little  girls  find  great  pleasure  in  making  their 
own  paper  dollies  and  the  garments  therefor.  Fashion 


82   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

papers  and  catalogues  afford  many  dolls  for  cutting 
out,  and  tissue  paper,  crinkled  paper,  the  lace  paper 
found  in  candy  boxes,  etc.,  form  the  raw  material  for 
beautiful  Parisian  gowns. 

Dolls  may  of  course  be  cut  out  of  white  paper  and 
beautiful  countenances  painted  upon  them,  or  holes 
may  be  cut  in  the  head  for  eyes,  nose  and  mouth. 

8.  Rag    Doll    (White    cotton   cloth,    cotton    batting, 
paints,  scissors,  needle,  thread,  water-color  paints 
or  blueing  and  red  ink,  raveled  rope,  etc.) 
Cut  a  large  newspaper  pattern  of  a  doll.     Then 
double  the  cloth,  pin  the  pattern  upon  it  and  cut  the 
two  sides  for  the  doll.    Run  neatly  around  with  close 
stitches,  beginning  at  the  neck,  and  when  nearly  fin- 
ished turn  inside  out,  stuff  with  the  cotton  batting,  and 
sew  up  the  head.    Paint  in  the  features  or  use  blueing 
for  eyes  and  red  ink  for  mouth  and  cheeks.    Ravelings 
of  rope  will  make  silky  hair,  and  fingers  may  be  indi- 
cated by  stitches. 


SOME  DOLL-HOUSES 

1.  Cigar-Box  House    (Small  cigar-box,  paste,  scis- 

sors, pictures,  etc.) 

A  cigar-box,  small  as  it  is,  will  give  great  delight 
to  a  child  who  is  aided  in  furnishing  a  little  room. 
Stand  the  box  up  on  the  long  side.  Paper  with  wall 
paper  of  a  small  design.  Then  furnish  with  things 
made  by  the  child  himself;  pictures  cut  from  cata- 
logues, and  other  accessories  as  described  below. 

2.  Pasteboard-Box  House   (Four  pasteboard  boxes, 

glue,  paint) 


Dolls  and  Doll-Houses  83 

Select  four  strong  pasteboard  boxes  of  uniform 
size.  Boxes  such  as  the  "Martha  Washington  Can- 
dles" are  packed  in  will  do.  They  measure  7  x  n 
inches.  Lay  aside  the  covers  and  remove  any  paper 
which  may  be  attached  to  the  inside  of  the  box. 
Spread  a  thick  paste  of  Spaulding's  glue  or  furniture 
glue  over  the  surface  of  one  side  of  a  box.  Fit  one 
side  of  a  second  to  this  glued  surface  and  put  aside 
to  dry.  The  third  and  fourth  boxes  are  treated  in  the 
same  manner.  When  securely  glued  in  pairs  place 
the  boxes  with  open  sides  facing  you.  Cover  upper 
outside  surface  of  one  pair  of  boxes  with  a  thick  coat- 
ing of  glue  and  set  the  second  pair  on  top  of  these  in 
the  same  position. 

Now,  one  has  a  pasteboard  house  of  four  rooms 
— two  upstairs  and  two  downstairs.  When  securely 
fastened  together  cut  in  the  partition  separating  the 
two  upper  rooms  a  door  four  inches  high  and  three 
wide.  Two  windows  measuring  3x4  inches,  two 
inches  from  floor,  may  be  cut  in  the  back  of  the  house. 
The  same  treatment  may  be  given  the  rooms  down- 
stairs. One  may  arrange  a  kitchen  and  dining-room 
downstairs  and  a  parlor  and  bedroom  upstairs. 

Oil  paints,  such  as  are  used  in  painting  furniture, 
which  come  already  mixed  in  small  cans,  may  be  used 
for  painting  the  exterior  of  the  house. 

In  using  this  paint  it  is  well  to  remember  always 
to  put  sufficient  paint  on  the  brush  to  cover  the 
entire  surface  of  the  wall  of  the  house,  from  edge  to 
edge,  without  lifting  the  brush.  A  strict  observance 
of  this  rule  insures  a  neatly  painted  surface.  If  de- 
sired, one  may  use  yellow,  green,  or  any  light  color 
for  the  interior. 

Remnants  of  cartridge  paper  or  paper  decorated 
in  small  designs  can  often  be  obtained  of  paper- 


84   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

hangers  for  a  small  sum.     It  may  be  fastened  to  the 
floor  to  serve  as  a  large  rug. 

3.  Soap-Box  House  (Three  wooden  soap-boxes,  nails, 

saw,  paint) 

Take  three  soap-boxes,  wooden.  Remove  the 
covers  from  two  and  place  one  upon  the  other  to  make 
a  two-story  house.  Put  in  partitions  thus :  Take  a 
thin  piece  of  board  (from  a  smaller  box),  saw  to 
needed  height  and  depth  and  nail  it  in  place  by  driv- 
ing nails  from  above,  below  or  the  side,  as  the  case 
may  require.  A  stiff  piece  of  cardboard  (taken  from 
a  large  box)  may  be  made  to  serve  as  partition.  If 
cut  to  the  right  size  the  pressure  from  top  and  bot- 
tom will  hold  in  place. 

By  taking  tzvo  small  boxes  for  the  upper  floor 
instead  of  one  large  one  the  space  which  would  be 
naturally  left  between  can  be  made  into  a  hallway. 
Stairs  may  then  be  made  of  stiff  cardboard,  folded 
into  steps,  with  a  strip  of  obliquely-cut  paper  pasted 
along  the  edges  of  the  steps  to  keep  them  in  place. 

If  windows  and  doorways  are  desired  they  must 
be  cut  or  sawed  in  after  being  drawn  where  desired 
in  pencil. 

The  third  box  is  for  the  gable  roof.  It  is  to  be 
placed  on  top  of  the  upper  floor  so  that  its  sides  slant 
for  the  roof.  Put  in  place  and  then  mark  off  all  that 
needs  to  be  sawed  away.  When  ready  to  be  fixed 
permanently  put  in  place  and  nail  through. 

The  furnishing  of  the  little  house  gives  much 
scope  for  ingenuity  and  invention  as  well  as  for  the 
exercise  of  good  sense  and  good  taste. 

The  exterior  of  the  house  can  be  painted  with 
house  paint,  and  this  gives  occasion  for  the  broad  use 


Dolls  and  Doll-Houses  85 

of  the  larger  muscles,  and  physiologists  tell  us  that  the 
little  child  should  exercise  the  larger  muscles  and 
nerves  while  the  finer  ones  are  still  undeveloped. 

Tiling    (Corrugated  packing  cardboard,   tacks,   ham- 
mer) 

The  roof  may  be  given  a  tiled  effect  by  covering 
with  corrugated  packing  cardboard  saved  from  pack- 
ages. Tack  this  on. 

Papering 

1.  Paper  with  wall-paper.     Scraps  of  it  may  be 
saved  when  the  home  is  being  papered. 

2.  Oil-cloth  effects  may  be  obtained  by  pasting 
on  floors  or  walls  designs  made  with  the  kindergarten 
parquetry  papers.     (See  page  168.) 

3.  Friezes  may  be  made  in  the  same  way  by  using 
circles  and  squares  in  rows,  alternately  or  successively. 


DOLL  FURNITURE 

1.  Cork.     (See  page  37.) 

2.  Block    (Blocks   of  wood   or   kindergarten   blocks, 

cubes  and  oblongs} 

Glue  these  blocks  together,  three  cubes  making 
a  little  chair,  and  cubes  and  oblongs  making  a  bed  or 
sofa.  Get  the  carpenter  to  saw  a  number  of  blocks 
of  different  shapes  and  sizes  and  let  the  child  use  his 
invention  in  putting  them  together.  The  furniture 
may  be  painted  or  gilded. 

3.  Paper  or  Cardboard 

Take  a  piece  of  paper  1x2  inches.    Fold  cross- 


86  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

wise.  Make  a  dot  ^4  inch  from  the  folded  edge  and 
*/s  inch  from  right  hand  edge.  Make  dot  ]/4  inch  from 
fold  and  %  inch  from  left  hand  edge.  From  open 
edges  opposite  fold  make  two  parallel  cuts  to  these 
dots.  These  cuts  make  the  four  legs.  When  opened 
out  a  table  is  seen  with  two  extensions  for  drop-leaf. 
Cut  one  of  these  extensions  off  and  a  chair  is  made. 
If  the  original  paper  is  longer  and  wider  it  can  be 
made  into  a  bed,  what  were  the  leaves  of  the  table  be- 
ing bent  up  into  the  head  and  foot  of  the  bed.  An  in- 
genious child  can  vary  and  elaborate  this  furniture  ad 
infinitum.  The  backs  can  be  cut  into  fancy  form  and 
arms  given  to  chairs  and  sofa. 

Use  one  of  these  paper  chairs  for  a  model,  place 
on  cardboard  and  draw  around  the  outline  and  so 
obtain  a  stiffer  bit  of  furniture.  Rockers  can  be  drawn, 
added  to  the  feet,  and  cut  out,  thus  making  a  rocking 
chair. 

SPECIAL    ARTICLES    OF    FURNITURE 

Pictures  and  Clocks  (Trade  journals,  scissors) 
Cut  from  trade  journals  and  attach  to  walls. 

Lamp  (Twist  spool,  toothpick,  half  egg-shell,  wax) 

Paste  a  bit  of  paper  on  top  and  bottom  of  twist 
spool.  Through  this  stick  a  toothpick,  which  the 
paper  should  hold  firmly.  Upon  the  top  of  the  tooth- 
pick fasten  a  half  egg-shell  for  a  globe  with  bit  of 
wax  or  glue. 

Stove  (Cardboard,  black  ink  or  paint) 

Make  oblong  box  of  cardboard.  Turn  upside 
down  and  cut  openings  for  top  of  stove.  Make  a 
small  hole  in  the  back  of  the  stove  and  insert  in  it  a 


Dolls  and  Doll-Houses  87 

piece  of  paper  rolled  into  a  stove-pipe  and  pasted. 
Cut  openings  in  front  for  the  grate  and  ovens,  leaving 
a  door  for  the  latter.  Ink  or  paint  black. 

Windows  (Thin  white  paper,  oil,  glue) 

Brush  a  piece  of  white  paper  over  with  ordinary 
machine  oil,  or  olive  oil,  or  dip  it  in  the  oil  and  when 
dry  glue  in  for  windows,  telling  the  children  that  not 
very  long  ago  that  was  the  only  way  in  which  light 
was  admitted  to  many  houses  before  glass  became  so 
common. 

Isinglass  may  also  be  put  in  for  windows. 

Doll's  Bedstead  (Cigar-box,  glue,  gilt-headed  tacks) 
Saw  the  cover  of  box  into  two  pieces,  one  for  the 
head  and  one  for  the  foot.  Fasten  in  place  to  the  box 
with  the  decorative  tacks.  Legs  may  be  attached  if 
desired. 

Curtains  (Cheesecloth  or  lace,  needle,  thread) 

Cut  small  squares  of  cheesecloth  and  let  the  child 
hem  and  put  in  windows  for  curtains.  Do  not  insist 
on  very  fine  sewing  for  beginners.  Curtains  may  be 
edged  with  lace,  or  the  entire  curtain  may  be  made 
of  lace,  tacked  or  glued  to  inside  of  window. 

Telephone  (Two  spools,  nail,  tin  mucilage  top,  string, 

small  flat  block) 

Take  a  flat  piece  of  wood  about  two  inches  square. 
Glue  to  it  the  flat  end  of  small  spool.  That  is  the 
'phone.  Another  spool  is  the  receiver  hanging,  when 
not  in  use,  upon  a  nail  driven  into  the  wood.  The 
mucilage  top  has  the  slot  into  which  to  drop  the  im- 
aginary nickel. 


88   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 


MISCELLANEOUS 

Grocery  Store  (Wooden  soap-box,  small  cardboard 
box,  scales,  toy  barrels,  tiny  pill  boxes,  sand, 
pebbles,  etc.) 

A  small  wooden  box  makes  the  store.  A  smaller 
cardboard  box  turned  upside  down  will  make  the 
counter,  or  small  pieces  of  wood  can  be  nailed  to- 
gether by  the  little  amateur  carpenter.  Buy  toy  scales 
or  make  some  as  described  below.  Small  barrels  can 
be  obtained  at  toy  store  or  little  bottles  and  boxes  can 
be  filled  with  small  quantities  of  tea  and  sugar,  with 
tiny  bags  of  pebbles  for  potatoes,  apples,  etc.  Cran- 
berries make  acceptable  play  apples.  Corn  and  nuts  also 
will  find  places.  Tacks  can  be  hammered  in  on  which 
to  hang  tiny  brooms,  and  by  hammering  in  two  long 
nails  and  laying  a  narrow  board  upon  them  a  shelf 
can  be  made  for  the  canned  vegetables.  Let  the 
children  make  their  own  brown  paper  bags,  looking  at 
a  real  one  for  a  model. 

Scales  (Two  small  square  cardboard  boxes,  made  or 
bought,  tivine,  skewer  or  other  slender  stick  of 
wood  or  metal) 

In  each  of  the  four  sides  of  a  box  make  a  small 
hole  near  the  top.  Take  two  pieces  of  twine  each  four 
times  the  width  of  the  box.  Tie  one  of  these  through 
two.  opposite  holes  of  the  box  and  the  other  piece 
through  the  two  other  holes,  being  sure  that  the 
strings  when  tied  are  of  equal  length.  These  two 
strings  cross  each  other.  In  the  middle,  exactly  where 
they  cross,  tie  one  end  of  a  string  three  inches  long. 
Raise  the  box  by  this  string  and  it  should  hang  ex- 
actly true.  Arrange  the  other  box  in  the  same  way. 


Dolls  and  Doll-Houses  89 

Now  take  the  skewer  and  exactly  in  the  middle 
tie  a  string  of  three  inches.  To  the  ends  of  the  stick 
tie  the  ends  of  the  twine  already  tied  to  the  boxes. 
Raise  the  skewer  by  this  string  and  the  boxes  should 
hang  evenly,  like  scales.  If  they  do  not,  slide  one  or 
the  other  back  and  forth  until  they  do  balance. 

Use  in  the  toy  grocery  store.  Playing  store  is 
always  a  fine  opportunity  for  indicating  lessons  of 
honesty  in  business.  Train  the  child  to  give  fair 
weight  and  measure,  even  in  play. 

Merry-Go-Round  for  Dolls    (Cardboard,  large  rib- 
bon  spool,   stiff  paper   or   kindergarten   folding 
paper,  slender  pencil,  tiny  flag) 
Cut  two  circles  of  cardboard,  one  five  inches  in 
diameter;  the  other,  ten  to  twelve.    Using  the  smaller 
one  as  a  base,  stand  on  it  a  large  ribbon  spool  (spool 
around  which  baby  ribbon  comes).    Glue  the  large  cir- 
cle to  the  other  end  of  the  spool,  parallel  to  the  other 
lower  circle.    Make  a  hole  in  each  circle.    Run  a  slen- 
der pencil  through  the  upper  cardboard,  then  through 
the  spool,  and  then  through  the  lower  circle,  making 
an  axis  round  which  the  spool  may  revolve,  carrying 
with  it  the  upper  circle. 

On  the  upper  circle  paste  alternately  animals  cut 
from  paper  or  cardboard,  and  benches  also  cut  from 
cardboard.  Elegance  may  be  added  by  gilding  the 
spool  and  letting  a  tiny  flag  float  from  the  point  of  the 
pencil.  Cut  out  paper  dolls  for  a  ride. 

Dolls'   Park    (Starch-box,   earth,   moss,   twigs,   tiny 

mirror,  etc.) 

Fill  the  box  with  earth  and  sand  for  a  founda- 
tion, and  then  with  moss,  twigs,  elder-berry  sprigs, 


90  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

etc.,  fill  in  the  fairy-like  details.  A  toy  swan  or  boat 
adds  to  the  reality. 

Rugs  for  Doll-House 

1.  Make  the  loom  by  taking  a  slate  and  knocking 
out  the  slate  so  as  to  leave  the  frame  intact.     Ham- 
mer a  row  of  small  nails  half  an  inch  apart  along  the 
two  narrow  sides.    Then  make  the  warp  by  stringing 
strong  cord  back  and  forth  across  the  nails.    Tie  first 
around  one  corner  nail ;  carry  to  and  around  the  two 
nails  opposite,  then  back  and  around  the  next  two,  and 
so  back  and  forth  till  it  is  all  strung.     The  rows  of 
cord  should  be  parallel. 

2.  Instead  of  a  slate,  looms  of  various  sizes  may 
be  roughly  made  of  four  narrow  pieces  of  wood  meas- 
ured, sawed,  and  nailed  together  at  the  corners.     A 
curtain  slat  could  be  so  used,  or  wooden  boxes  will 
furnish  raw  material  for  such.    A  loom  4x6  inches 
is  a  good  size  for  a  beginner. 

For  woof,  use  coarse  worsted  or  ribbon  to  begin 
with,  or  colored  cheesecloth  torn  into  narrow  strips. 

Use  the  fingers  at  first,  later  a  bodkin,  weaving 
under  one  cord  of  the  warp  and  over  one,  back  and 
forth,  till  a  tiny  rug  is  made.  Fasten  ends  by  weav- 
ing in  and  out  a  short  distance  into  body  of  rug.  At 
first  make  rug  all  of  one  color,  or  a  rag-carpet  effect 
can  be  obtained  by  tying  into  a  long  string  worsteds 
of  various  colors.  If  a  plain  color  is  used  a  border 
can  be  made  by  running  in  a  strand  or  so  of  a  dif- 
ferent color. 

Let  the  child  employ  his  artistic  and  creative 
abilities  in  making  designs  for  the  rug  with  paints  or 
crayons.  Draw  an  oblong  of  one  color  with  stripes 
across  the  ends,  one,  two  or  three  in  number,  at  dif- 
ferent distances  apart.  Variety  can  be  secured  by 


Dolls  and  Doll-Houses  91 

taking  up  two  threads  at  a  time  or  running  under  one 
and  over  two,  etc.  Warn  the  child  not  to  draw  the 
threads  too  closely  or  the  rug  will  have  the  shape  of 
an  hour-glass  when  finished. 

A  washcloth  can  be  made  thus  by  weaving  it  of 
narrow  pieces  of  cheesecloth. 

Take  the  rug  or  cloth  off  the  loom  by  raising 
carefully  over  the  nails. 

3.  Another  simple  kind  of  loom  is  made  by  tak- 
ing a  piece  of  cardboard  measuring  6x8  inches. 
Draw  a  row  of  eight  dots  half  an  inch  apart.  Oppo- 
site these,  and  six  inches  away,  draw  another  row. 
With  strong  cord  sew  through  these  a  set  of  straight 
stitches,  six  inches  long  and  half  an  inch  apart.  This 
makes  the  warp.  Run  the  worsted  woof  under  and 
over  these  cords  as  in  any  weaving,  and  tear  the  card- 
board away  when  finished. 


CHAPTER  VII 

PLAYS  AND  GAMES 

In  playing  games  children  learn  lessons  of  fair 
play,  of  mutual  forbearance  and  patience,  and  of 
letting  a  playfellow  "have  a  chance,"  which  they  learn 
in  no  other  way.  Apart  from  the  important  bodily 
exercise  and  development  gained  in  the  active  physical 
games,  the  demand  upon  mental  and  moral  qualities 
is  of  immeasurable  value. 

A  child  should  never  be  permitted  to  cheat  at  a 
game,  even  "in  fun."  A  game  loses  significance  as  a 
game  when  one  person  does  not  "play  fair."  The 
child  to  whom  even  the  thought  of  so  doing  is  impos- 
sible begins  the  race  of  life  with  an  immense  advan- 
tage, for  we  believe  that  the  foundation  for  all  real 
life  is  character. 

We  give  a  few  games  which  have  been  tried  with 
success  either  in  the  home,  the  kindergarten,  or  the 
playground.  Some  of  these  plays  require  materials; 
others  do  not.  In  some  cases  instructions  are  given 
for  making  the  required  materials. 


TAG  GAMES 

Circle  Tag 

One  person  stands  in  the  center  of  a  ring  of  chil- 
dren and  each  one  in  the  ring  holds  out  his  right 
hand.     The  one  in  the  middle  tags  one  of  the  hands 
92 


Plays  and  Games  93 

and  the  owner  immediately  gives  chase  till  he  catches 
the  pursued. 

Vary  by  having  both  tagged  and  tagger  skip, 
hop,  etc.,  instead  of  run. 

Racing  Tag 

Players  form  circle.  One  goes  outside  the  ring 
and  runs  or  walks  around,  suddenly  quietly  touching 
another  player,  who  immediately  races  with  him,  go- 
ing around  the  ring  in  opposite  direction. 

Vary  by  having  contestants  bow  three  times  as 
they  pass  each  other. 

Wood,  Iron  or  Paper  Tag 

One  child  chases  another  who  touches  for  goal 
anything  made  of  wood,  or  iron,  or  paper,  etc.,  as  has 
been  decided  upon  beforehand.  If  the  pursued  is 
caught  before  he  succeeds  in  touching  such  object, 
he  becomes  "it."  The  goal  may  be  a  wooden  stick 
or  tree,  or  an  iron  rake,  or  a  paper  book,  etc. 

Japanese  Tag 

Form  a  long  line  of  children,  one  following 
closely  behind  another  in  a  march  or  run.  One 
child  outside  the  line  is  "it."  He  tries  to  tag  some 
one  in  the  line.  The  leader  endeavors  to  prevent  this 
by  twisting  his  file  rapidly  in  and  out  in  a  curving 
line,  and,  by  so  throwing  out  his  arms,  as  to  protect  the 
threatened  one,  as  the  line  twists  and  turns  with  him. 
If  one  is  tagged,  the  leader  becomes  "it."  The  leader 
and  his  train  of  children  must  of  course  be  alert  in 
mind  and  active  in  body. 


Cross-Tag 


js- 1  ag 

Of  a  group  of  children  the  one  who  is  "it"  chases 


94   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

any  one  he  chooses  to  begin  with,  but  if  another  child 
runs  in  between  the  chased  and  the  chaser,  the  chaser 
must  follow  the  one  who  has  thus  run  in  between.  If 
he  shows  signs  of  fatigue  a  third  child  may  run  across 
between  the  two,  etc.,  he  then  being  chased  until  the 
tagger  succeeds  in  catching  some  one,  who  in  turn  be- 
comes "it." 


RACES 

Allied  to  the  tag  games  are  the  racing  games,  of 
which  we  give  only  two. 

Potato  Race  (Twelve  potatoes,  two  tablespoons') 

Place  six  potatoes  in  a  row  about  three  feet  apart. 
Place  six  others  in  a  parallel  row  some  distance  away. 
Give  two  players  each  a  spoon,  and  at  a  signal  they 
start  to  race.  Each  player  runs  up  his  row,  picking 
up  the  potatoes,  one  by  one,  carrying  each  in  turn  to 
a  given  point,  then  coming  back  for  another  potato, 
till  all  are  thus  carried.  The  left  hand  must  not  assist. 
The  one  who  first  gets  his  potatoes  safely  to  the  spot 
decided  upon  wins. 

Clothespin  Race  (Hand fid  of  clothespins) 

Arrange  the  children  in  two  rows,  equal  in  num- 
ber. Give  the  first  child  a  handful  of  clothespins,  laid 
straight.  At  a  signal  he  passes  them  down  the  line. 
If  one  is  dropped  it  must  be  picked  up  by  the  one 
dropping  it  and  put  as  before  with  the  others  and  then 
passed  on.  Reaching  the  end  of  the  line,  they  are  at 
once  passed  back  again  to  the  starting  point.  The  side 
wins  which  first  get  back  all  the  pins. 


Plays  and  Games  95 


AIMING  GAMES  WITH  BEAN-BAGS 

Kinds  of  Bags  (i.  Ticking  or  strong  calico,  strong 
thread,  needle,  baking-beans.  2.  Felt,  sewing 
silk) 

1.  Make  a  strong  bag  of  bright  colored  material, 
6x8  inches  in  size.     Fill  with  the  ordinary  baking- 
beans  and  overhand  the  top. 

2.  Take  a  piece  of  felt  or  any  pretty  strong  ma- 
terial which  will  bear  the  wear  and  tear  of  the  game. 
Cut  into  two  circles  5  or  6  inches  in  diameter.     Sew 
together  on  the  wrong  side,  with  a  seam  of  one  fourth 
inch.     Then  cut  in  the  center  a  small  circle  half  an 
inch   in   diameter.     Turn   the   odd-shaped  bag   inside 
out,  fill  with  beans  and  overhand  the   small  circular 
opening  with  close  stitches  of  silk.     These  bags  can 
be  more  easily  caught  than  balls  by  little  hands. 

Kinds  of  Games 

Children  usually  hand  down  familiar  games  from 
one  generation  to  another.     Here  are  a  few : 

1.  Children  stand  in  a  circle  with  one  in  the  cen- 
ter who  throws  the  bag  to  each  in  turn  all  around  the 
ring,  or  else  tries  to  catch  some  one  napping  by  throw- 
ing it  unexpectedly.  £ 

2.  Vary  by  having  children  stand  in  a  row  and 
the  leader  throws  to  each  in  turn.     Or  children  stand 
in  opposite  rows  and  every  one  in  one  line  has  a  bag 
which  all  throw  in  unison  to  the  child  opposite.     These 
in  turn  throw  back  in  perfect  rythm. 

3.  Vary  again  by  tossing  into  the  air  in  unison. 
The   accompaniment   of  music   is  always   a  thing  to 
be  desired  in  such  rythmic  games. 


96   Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

4.  One  child  stands  in  center  of  ring  and  tries 
to  catch  the  bag  as  it  is  tossed  across  to  some  one  on 
the  other  side  of  the  ring. 


AIMING  GAMES  WITH  BALLS 

The  games  just  described  may  be  played  with 
balls  as  well  as  with  bean-bags,  and  thus  require  more 
co-ordination  on  the  part  of  the  child's  muscles.  We 
give  a  few  other  games  in  addition. 

Counting-Ball 

Let  one  child  bounce  the  ball,  striking  it  from 
above  with  the  palm  of  his  hand  and  counting  one, 
two,  etc.,  until  he  fails  to  hit  it,  when  another  child 
takes  a  turn. 

A  Guess-Ball 

A  row  of  players  number  off  from  one  end  I,  2, 
3,  4,  etc.  The  last  number  steps  in  front  of  the  row 
a  distance  such  as  may  be  needed  to  secure  certainty 
of  aim  and  touch  on  the  part  of  those  who  throw  the 
ball.  The  player  in  front  stands  with  his  back  to  the 
others.  Those  in  the  row  now  begin  to  pass  the  ball 
sideways  from  one  to  the  other.  The  player  in  front 
having  counted  a  given  number,  the  one  who  happens 
to  hold  the  ball  at  the  time  must  at  once  throw  it  at 
the  player  in  front.  If  struck,  the  latter  turns  quickly 
and  tries  to  judge  from  the  attitudes  of  the  various 
players  which  one  threw  the  ball.  If  he  is  right, 
places  are  exchanged.  If  he  guesses  wrong,  the  game 
continues  as  before. 

Cup  and  Ball  (Cardboard,  worsted,  funnel) 

Make  the  ball  by  cutting   from   cardboard   two 


Plays  and  Games  97 

circles  about  two  inches  in  diameter.  Inside  the  large 
circles  draw  smaller  ones  about  one-half  inch  in  diam- 
eter. Cut  the  smaller  circles  entirely  out,  thus  leaving 
a  hole  in  the  middle  of  each  large  circle.  Keep  these 
two  large  circles  together.  Now,  with  a  needle,  wind 
worsted  round  and  round  through  the  opening  in  the 
two  circles  until  it  is  completely  rilled,  so  that  the 
needle  cannot  be  pushed  through.  Hold  in  the  left 
hand,  and  with  sharp  pointed  scissors  cut  the  worsted 
at  the  edge  of  the  circles,  spread  the  circles  a  little 
apart,  and  tie  a  strong  thread  firmly  around  the  worsted 
between  the  two  cardboard  circles.  Then  tear  the 
cardboard  circles  away  and  a  pretty  ball  remains.  Tie 
this  ball,  with  a  string  twelve  inches  long,  to  a  kitchen 
funnel,  and  let  the  child  try  to  catch  the  ball  in  the 
funnel. 

AIMING  GAMES— MISCELLANEOUS 

Ring-Toss  (Small  wooden  box,  broom-handle  or 
dou'el,  nail  or  glue,  embroidery  rings  or  hoops  of 
small  keg) 

Saw  a  foot  from  a  broom-handle  or  dowel  (a 
child's  broom  will  best  serve  the  purpose).  Glue  or 
nail  this  to  a  box.  Let  the  child  practice  tossing  over 
this  post  rings  taken  from  a  small  keg ;  or  embroidery 
rings  may  be  used.  These  may  be  wound  around  with 
bright  colored  strips  of  lining  or  with  ribbon.  The 
rings  should  be  graduated  in  size. 

Grace-Hoops  (Basket  reeds,  rama) 

Make  a  wand  of  three  or  four  basket  reeds  cut 
into  two  foot  lengths.  Wind  these  more  or  less 
loosely  with  string,  just  so  as  to  hold  them  together. 
Then  wind  around  and  around  closely  and  smoothly 
with  a  strand  of  raffia  so  as  to  bind  firmly  together. 


98  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

If  held  smoothly,  several  strands  of  raffia  may  be  used 
at  one  time.  If  reeds  are  not  to  be  had  lilac  branches 
may  be  used  instead.  The  result  should  be  a  wand 
firm  and  stiff. 

Make  the  hoops  by  soaking  the  reeds  first  in 
water  for  an  hour  to  make  flexible.  They  should  be 
cut  into  lengths  of  about  2l/2  feet.  Curve  several  into 
a  hoop  and  tie.  Then  wind  smoothly  and  firmly  with 
the  raffia.  The  ends  of  the  latter  may  be  disposed  of 
by  threading  upon  a  large  needle  and  running  it  a 
short  distance  in  and  out  of  the  part  already  wound. 

Two  wands  and  one  hoop  are  required  for  each 
player.  One  tosses  a  ring  from  her  two  wands  to  her 
opponent,  who  must  catch  it  upon  her  own  wands. 

This  once  popular  game  cultivates  both  alertness 
and  grace. 

In  the  kindergarten  the  children  use  wand  and 
ring  in  playing  "knights."  One  child  holds  the  ring 
while  the  little  knight  gallops  around  the  circle  on 
an  imaginary  steed  and  tries  to  capture  the  ring  on 
his  lance  (wand),  as  at  an  old-time  tournament. 

Croquet  with  Peas  (Peas,  hairpins  or  double-headed 

tacks,  nail  or  match,  toothpick,  cork,  cover  of 

starch-box) 

Bend  hairpins  into  shape  or  use  double-headed 
tacks  as  wickets.  Insert  into  the  cover  of  a  wooden 
starch-box  for  ground.  For  a  stake  use  a  nail  or  a 
painted  match-stick.  Sharpen  this  to  a  point  and 
insert  it  in  a  hole  previously  made  by  hammering  in 
a  nail.  Make  mallets  by  inserting  matches  or  tooth- 
picks into  heads  made  of  small  pieces  of  cork.  Use 
peas  for  balls. 

Put  the  whole  outfit  in  a  box  and  give  to  little 
sister  for  her  doll's  birthday. 


Plays  and  Games  99 

Egg-Shell  Game    (Egg-shell,  long  table,  four  tum- 
blers) 

Blow  an  egg-shell  and  paint  with  some  college 
colors  as  a  foot-ball.  Take  four  tumblers  and  place 
two  at  one  end  of  a  long  table  for  goals  and  two  at 
the  opposite  end  for  goals,  the  two  which  make  a  pair 
being  four  inches  apart.  Divide  the  party  into  two 
competing  groups.  Those  on  one  side  must  try  to 
blow  the  shell  between  the  tumblers  of  their  opponents. 
These  must  try  to  defend  their  end  of  the  table  and  at 
the  same  time  try  to  blow  the  shell  between  the  tum- 
blers of  their  opponents.  This  makes  a  merry  game 
for  young  people. 


Cherry-Stone  Game  (Save  and  dry  a  dozen  or  wore 

cherry-stones) 

Scatter  the  stones  lightly  on  the  table.  They  will 
fall  so  that  some  lie  closely  together,  others  far  apart. 
The  first  player  selects  any  two  stones  and  draws  his 
finger  between  them  so  that  he  touches  neither.  If 
he  succeeds  thus  far  he  must  then  try  to  snap  one 
(with  thumb  and  middle  finger)  so  that  it  strikes  the 
other.  If  this  succeeds  also  the  two  stones  belong  to 
him  and  he  has  another  turn,  continuing  until  he  either 
touches  a  stone  in  trying  to  draw  a  finger  between  two 
or  fails  to  make  one  of  the  two  hit  the  other.  The 
second  player  will  not  fare  so  well,  because  the  re- 
maining pairs  will  lie  closer  together  than  those  first 
chosen,  so  that  great  care  will  be  needed  in  drawing 
the  finger  between  two.  Sometimes  it  is  necessary 
to  use  the  little  finger.  At  the  end  the  player  having 
most  stones  wins  the  game.  The  stones  may  be  dyed 
or  painted  if  desired.  The  game  suggests  tiddledy- 
winks  and  crokinole. 


ioo  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Donkey  Game  (Picture  of  a  donkey,  minus  a  tail,  and 

one  dozen  separate  tails.     These  may  be  bought 

in  large  sheets  for  ten  cents,  but  may  be  cut  out 

of  paper  if  drawn  first  by  skilful  hands) 

Pin  the  picture  to  the  wall  in  some  spot  where  it 

will  not  deface  it.     Give  each  player  a  tail  with  a  pin 

sticking  through  it.    Blindfold  him.    Turn  him  around 

three   times   and   send   him   in   the   direction   of  the 

picture  to  pin  the  tail  on  the  donkey.     The  one  who 

succeeds  in  fastening  a  tail  nearest  to  the  proper  place 

wins  the  game. 

Blowing  Out  the  Candle  (Candle  in  candlestick) 

Place  a  candle  on  the  table.  Blindfold  a  player, 
turn  him  around  three  times  about  six  feet  from  the 
candle.  Then  let  him  try  to  find  his  way  towards  it 
and  blow  it  out.  He  may  have  three  trials. 


MISCELLANEOUS  PLAYS 

The  Countess  of  the  Huggermuggers  ( Two  candles 

in  candlesticks) 

Give  two  players  each  a  candle.  They  take  places 
about  eight  feet  apart.  Then  each  takes  a  step  for- 
ward at  the  same  time  and  makes  a  solemn  bow  without 
smiling;  then  another  step  and  bow;  and  then  a  third. 
Then  one  says  solemnly,  "The  Countess  of  the  Hugger- 
muggers  is  dead."  The  other  one  rejoins,  "I  am  very 
sorry  to  hear  it."  The  first  one  replies,  "So  am  I." 
Then  each  takes  three  steps  backward,  with  a  bow 
each  time,  and  all  without  a  smile.  Whoever  smiles 
must  give  up  his  place  to  another  player. 


Plays  and  Games 


101 


Rope  and  Sandbag  (Rope  ten  feet  long,  with  handle 
at  one  end  which  may  be  made  by  knotting  the 
rope,  and  a  sandbag  or  other  weight  at  the  other. 
Sandbag  may  be  made  of  strong  goods  sewed  into 
a  bag  and  filled  zvith  sand.  In  a  kindergarten  a 
weight  has  been  improvised  out  of  a  child's 
rubber  shoe) 

Some  one  stands  in  the  center  of  a  circle  of  chil- 
dren and  swings  the  rope  so  that  the  weight  just 
grazes  the  ground.  The  children  must  be  sufficiently 
attentive  and  agile  to  evade  the  rope  by  jumping  over 
it  as  it  passes  them.  Do  not  begin  until  the  rope  has 
acquired  momentum  enough  to  move  with  a  degree  of 
regularity. 

Omnibus  Swing  (Strong  rope  or  chain,  staples,  soap- 
box, wooden  plank,  nails) 

If  fortunate  enough  to  have  a  barn  or  summer- 
house,  or  a  playroom  with  a  strong  beam  in  the  roof 


Omnibus  Swing. 

or  ceiling,  piace  a  pair  of  strong  staples  in  the  beam 
(hammock  hooks  would  serve  the  same  purpose)   a 


io2  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

few  inches  apart.  Six  feet  from  these  place  another 
pair  of  staples  in  the  beam.  From  each  pair  of  staples 
or  hooks  suspend  a  loop  of  rope  so  that  it  comes  about 
one  foot  from  the  floor. 

Take  a  plank  about  eight  feet  long  and  one  foot 
wide  and  cut  four  notches  in  it,  two  on  each  side, 
about  six  inches  from  the  ends.  Place  the  plank  so 
that  it  hangs  held  by  the  two  ropes,  which  slip  into 
the  notches  in  the  plank,  the  notches  keeping  the  ropes 
in  place.  Upon  this  several  children  can  swing  back 
and  forth  lengthwise,  and  so  play  at  rowing,  riding, 
trolleying,  etc.,  as  imagination  dictates.  If  a  soap- 
box be  nailed  at  one  end  the  baby  may  be  put  into  this 
for  a  safe  ride. 

Anagrams  (Tinted  Bristol  board,  black  ink  or  paint, 

heavy  pen  or  brush} 

Cut  the  Bristol  board  into  i-inch  squares  and  let 
the  child  paint  or  draw  upon  these  squares  the  letters 
of  the  alphabet,  one  letter  to  each  square.  There 
should  be  at  least  a  dozen  of  each  letter  and  many 
more  A's,  E's  and  S's,  as  these  letters  occur  frequently 
in  English  words.  Two  games  may  be  played  with 
these  letters  as  follows : 

1.  Give  the  child  the  four  or  five  letters  that  com- 
pose a  word  and  let  him  try  to  put  them  together  in 
the  right  way  as:  H-s-e-r-o  (Horse}. 

2.  Several  players  are  needed  for  this  game.    The 
cards  must  be  placed  upside  down  in  a  box  so  that  the 
letters  are  not  seen.     Each  player  takes  a  letter  in 
turn,  the  first  time  round,  and  places  it  in  the  centre 
of  the  table.    At  the  second  time  round,  each,  as  he 
takes  a  square  from  the  box,  tries  to  form  a  word 
with  it,  either  by  using  a  letter  from  the  central  pool 
or  by  taking  away  an  opponent's  word.     If  he  takes 


Plays  and  Games  103 

from  an  opponent  he  must  take  an  entire  word.  As 
he  forms  a  word  he  places  it  before  himself,  the  aim 
being  to  get  five  or  ten  words  before  any  opponent 
does.  If  he  can  form  no  word  he  puts  his  letter  in  the 
pool.  The  number 'of  words  making  the  game  must 
be  agreed  upon  beforehand.  For  example :  In  the  pool 
are  placed  in  turn  the  letters  g,  b,  f,  t.  Player  I,  con- 
tinuing, draws  from  the  box  the  letter  a  and  with  the 
letters  in  the  pool  can  form  bat,  which  he  places  in 
front  of  him,  leaving  g  and  /  in  the  pool.  Player  II 
draws  an  I,  and  as  he  can  form  no  word,  he  puts  it  in 
the  pool.  Player  III  draws  an  e  and  takes  away  the 
bat  of  No.  i,  turning  it  into  beat.  Player  II  draws  an 
o,  which  with  the  -g  from  the  pool,  he  turns  into  go. 
Player  I  then  draws  again,  and  so  the  game  continues 
until  one  player  has,  we  will  say,  five  words,  the  num- 
ber agreed  upon,  and  so  wins. 

Weighing  Honey 

One  child  crouches,  clasping  his  hands  beneath 
his  knees  tightly.  Two  older  persons  then  take  the 
handles  of  the  honey-jar  (the  child's  arms)  and  swing 
him  back  and  forth,  counting  one,  two,  three,  etc., 
with  each  swing  until  the  hands  give  way.  The  num- 
ber of  counts  tells  the  number  of  pounds  in  the  jar. 


SUGGESTIONS  FOR  CHILDREN'S  PARTIES 

Peanut  Party  (Several  quarts  of  peanuts,  and  a  pretty 
little  bag  measuring  6x8  inches  for  each  guest) 
Before  the  little  guests  arrive,  hide  the  peanuts 
in  corners,  under  cushions,  and  in  all  possible  hiding- 
places,  singly,  or  two  or  three  together.    At  a  signal 
all  of  the  children  begin  to  search  for  the  peanuts. 


104  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

The  one  finding  the  most  wins.  Give  a  reward  of  a 
peanut  doll.  (See  page  80.) 

In  no  such  games  of  competition  is  it  a  good  plan 
to  have  expensive  prizes.  That  plan  ministers  to  a 
weakness  inherent  perhaps  in  human  nature,  but  one 
to  be  discouraged — the  desire  to  win,  not  for  the  sake 
of  success,  but  for  the  sake  of  the  prize.  The  giving 
of  a  valuable  prize  engenders  feelings  of  envy  and 
caters  too  much  to  the  gambling  instinct.  It  tends  to 
destroy  the  spirit  of  fun  and  play  which  is  the  real 
object  of  a  social  gathering. 

A  part  of  such  an  entertainment  would  appro- 
priately be  the  making  of  peanut  taffy  or  of  peanut 
animals.  (See  page  23.) 

Spider- Web  Party  (Balls  of  pretty  twine,  one  color 

for  each  guest) 

Take  a  ball  of  twine  and  to  the  end  attach  a  card 
bearing  the  name  of  one  guest.  Then  unwind  it,  twist- 
ing it  around  different  articles  of  furniture,  chairs, 
table-legs,  door-knob,  chandelier,  etc.,  till  the  thread 
is  judged  to  be  long  enough.  Then  cut,  and  to  this 
end  tie  some  trifling  gift.  Arrange  in  this  way  one 
ball  and  gift  for  each  child  expected.  When  the  time 
for  playing  the  game  arrives,  give  to  each  child  the 
card  bearing  his  name,  to  which  twine  is  attached.  At 
the  signal  for  beginning,  each  one  follows  up  his  line, 
unwinding  and  disentangling  it  as  he  goes  along,  till 
the  end  of  the  cord  bearing  the  gift  is  reached.  As 
each  little  visitor  receives  something,  there  is  no  un- 
wholesome spirit  of  rivalry. 

Thimble-Biscuit  Party  (Dough,  silver  thimbles) 

While  making  biscuits  for  supper  give  the  little 
child  a  silver  thimble  to  use  as  a  biscuit  cutter,  first 


Plays  and  Games  105 

rolling  the  dough  to  a  thickness  one-third  the  height  of 
the  thimble.  When  he  has  made  a  good  array  put 
them  into  the  oven.  They  will  bake  quickly  and  to 
the  child  will  seem  to  surpass  the  best  cake  made. 

Invite  a  group  of  little  children  to  a  thimble- 
biscuit  party.  A  dough  of  flour,  water  or  milk,  a  little 
salt  and  baking  powder  will  be  sufficient  and  the 
little  workers  will  be  very  happy  making  the  wee  bis- 
cuits. Only  silver  thimbles  should  be  used. 

While  the  biscuits  are  baking  a  few  games,  nota- 
bly "Hide  the  Thimble,"  will  pass  the  time.  Served 
with  a  little  jam  or  milk  they  will  make  a  delicious 
repast,  with  dolls  and  Teddy  Bears  for  company. 

Butterfly  Party  (White  paper,  oil  paints,  in  tubes) 

Uncovering  the  tube,  make  a  dab  of  paint  with  it 
near  middle  of  a  sheet  of  paper.  Immediately  beneath 
make  a  long  stroke  of  another  color.  Now  fold  over 
lengthwise  along  the  middle  of  the  long  line  of  paint. 
While  folded  press  and  smooth  with  finger  over  the 
first  spot.  This  when  opened  will  be  the  head  of  the 
butterfly.  Keep  paper  still  folded,  however,  and  press 
along  the  line  of  paint  to  make  body  and  then  make  a 
•^ide  pressure  to  make  the  wings.  Open  out,  and  there 
is  the  general  suggestion  of  a  beautiful  butterfly,  which, 
held  up  so  that  the  light  shines  through,  may  be  really 
very  pretty.  A  little  experiment  will  show  how  im- 
provements can  be  made.  Any  color  may  be  used. 
Invite  your  friends  to  an  evening  butterfly  party  and 
give  a  prize  for  the  best  one  made ;  the  prize  may  very 
suitably  be  something  in  butterfly  form;  a  penwiper, 
or  lamp-shade,  or  something  similar. 

Autograph  Picture  (Ink,  paper,  coarse  pen) 

At  the  butterfly  party,  autograph  portraits  also 


io6  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

may  be  made.  With  a  coarse  pen,  filled  with  ink, 
each  person  writes  his  own  name  in  turn.  Take  the 
flowing  autograph,  fold  it  lengthwise  through  the  mid- 
dle and  crease,  making  special  pressure  at  the  top  and 
drawing  out  slightly  at  the  side.  Open  up  and  the 
result  is  a  queer  portrait  of  the  owner  of  the  autograph 
with  suggestion  of  head  and  arms. 

Enclose  autograph  on  two  sides  by  straight  lines ; 
when  folded  and  then  opened,  the  portrait  will  be 
framed. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

FESTIVAL  OCCASIONS 

Festivals  have  always  held  an  important  place  in 
the  life  of  home  and  community.  The  anniversary  of 
the  day  of  birth,  or  of  marriage,  the  day  of  gradua- 
tion, or  of  coming  of  age — what  opportunities  they 
offer  for  strengthening  the  ties  of  kinship,  for  creating 
hallowed  associations  that  may  often  prove  bulwarks 
of  safety  in  later  days  of  temptation  and  sorrow ! 

Christmas,  Easter,  Thanksgiving,  are  now  Na- 
tional holidays  with  us,  and  our  celebration  of  these 
beautiful  festivals  is  one  more  link  in  the  chain  which 
binds  us  to  all  races  and  creeds ;  for  the  return  of  the  sun 
at  the  winter  solstice,  the  renewal  of  life  in  the  spring, 
the  ingathering  of  fruits  in  the  autumn,  have  appealed 
to  all  peoples  as  fitting  occasions  for  the  expression 
of  religious  joy  and  for  mutual  congratulations  upon 
dangers  past  and  the  results  of  work  accomplished. 

In  the  joy  of  such  occasions,  we  must  not  let  them 
degenerate  into  the  mere  mercenary  exchange  of  ma- 
terial gifts. 

Christmas  is  preeminently  the  children's  day, 
when  we  annually  remind  ourselves  of  the  divinity 
inherent  in  all  childhood,  and  desire  to  bring  joy  to 
all  children  and  goodwill  to  all  peoples. 

Easter  means  most  to  the  adult  who  has  ex- 
perienced sorrow  and  disappointment  and  has  known 
something  of  the  anguish  and  awe  and  deepening  of 
life  that  comes  with  the  message  of  Death.  The 
pleasure  of  the  child  in  the  hare  and  the  Easter  egg 
107 


io8  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

must  not  be  allowed  altogether  to  overbalance  the 
wondrous  symbolism  of  the  Easter  lily. 

The  National  holidays — Washington's  Birthday, 
Memorial  Day,  Independence  Day,  etc. — take  us  out- 
side the  limits  of  the  home  and  remind  us  that,  as 
we  thank  the  men  and  women  of  the  past  for  the 
privileges  of  the  present  which  we  owe  to  their  sac- 
rifices and  aspirations,  so  we  should  realize  our  obliga- 
tions towards  the  future. 

In  celebrating  these  different  festivals,  let  the 
child  bear  his  small  part.  We  give  a  few  ideas  of 
things  which  he  may  do  or  make.  It  is  these  early 
impressions  which  are  the  lasting  ones.  The  actual 
service  demanded  of  the  child  counts  much  in  the  for- 
mation of  character,  though  even  more  important  is 
the  spirit  which  radiates  at  such  times  from  the  par- 
ents and  friends  who  celebrate  or  prepare  to  celebrate 
these  recurrent  holidays.  It  is  the  "spirit  which  giv- 
eth  life/'  here,  as  everywhere. 

The  suggestions  will  be  given  in  the  order  in 
which  the  holidays  come  in  the  year.  Where  an  arti- 
cle is  described  in  another  part  of  the  book,  it  will 
not  be  repeated,  but  the  page  number  will  be  given  for 
reference. 


NEW  YEAR'S  DAY 

Place  Cards  at  Table  (White  card,  pressed  four-leaf 
clover,  or  paints) 

1.  Having  found  and  pressed  four-leaved  clovers 
in  the  days  of  summer,  paste  one  lightly  to  each  place 
card  as  symbol  of  good-luck. 

2.  Copy  a  clover-leaf  with  paints  and  write  on 
card  some  appropriate  quotation  signifying  good-will. 


Festival  Occasions  109 

Decorated  Note  Paper   (Writing  paper,  leaf,  paste 

or  paints) 

Paste  a  real  clover  leaf  (or  paint  one)  on  the 
writing  paper  upon  which  you  may  be  writing  a  New 
Year's  letter  to  your  friend. 

Calendar  (12  oblong  blotters,  white  or  colored,  ribbon 
to  match,  I  inch  ivide  and  about  Y±  yards  long, 
tiny  calendar  pad,  paste) 

Take  the  calendar  pad  apart  and  paste  the  leaf  for 
each  month  upon  one  of  the  blotters.  Then  tie  the 
blotters  together  with  the  ribbon.  This  makes  suit- 
able New  Year's  gift.  (See  also  page  74.) 

New  Year's  Bells    (Red  cardboard,  scissors,  paste, 

ribbon) 

Cut  out  a  bell  and  paste  a  calendar  pad  on  it. 
Or  cut  12  small  bells  and  paste  one  leaf  of  calendar 
pad  on  each,  stringing  all  together  with  ribbon. 

Good-Luck  Pigs 

With  our  German  population  the  pig  signifies 
"good-luck,"  and  at  New  Year's  pigs,  big  and  little, 
made  of  various  materials,  are  quite  in  order.  A  fa- 
vorite candy,  made  of  sugar  and  bitter-almond,  is 
in  the  shape  of  a  pig,  and  is  used  to  present  to  friends 
at  this  holiday  time.  Many  suggestions  already  given 
may  be  carried  out  with  the  pig  idea  in  mind. 

Midnight  Watching 

If  friends  stay  up  to  watch  the  Old  Year  out, 
any  of  the  above-named  articles  may  be  made  by  the 
children  for  souvenirs.  A  poem  which  may  suitably 
be  read  at  this  time  is  Tennyson's  "Ring  Out,  Wild 
Bells ;"  also,  Longfellow's  "The  Poet's  Calendar."  A 


no  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

timely  topic  for  discussion  is  the  never-answered  ques- 
tion :  When  does  the  new  century  begin — with  Janu- 
ary I,  1900,  or  1901  ?  Timothy  Dwight,  President  of 
Yale  College,  1795-1817,  wrote  some  clever  verses 
apropos -of  the  subject  when  he  helped  usher  in  the 
1 9th  Century. 

ST.   VALENTINE'S   DAY 

Save  lace  papers  from  candy  and  soap  boxes  and 
they  will  prove  useful  when  St.  Valentine's  Day  comes 
in  making  Valentines.  With  these  papers  and  scis- 
sors, paste,  scrap  pictures  of  flowers,  doves,  etc.,  the 
children  will  spend  happy  hours  in  making  these 
dainty  souvenirs.  We  give  a  few  directions  for  mak- 
ing some  such. 

Single  Hearts  (Red  cardboard,  lace  paper,  scrap  pict- 
ures, scissors,  paste) 

Cut  a  heart  out  of  the  cardboard  and  around  the 
edge  paste  a  border  of  lace  paper,  fulling  slightly  and 
attaching  it  to  the  under  side  of  the  heart.  In  the 
centre  of  the  upper  side  of  the  heart  paste  a  pretty 
scrap  picture.  This  make  a  simple  but  effective 
Valentine. 

Chain  of  Hearts  (Red  cardboard,  scissors,  scrap  pic- 
tures, paste,  red  ribbon) 
Cut  several  hearts  out  of  the  cardboard,  and,  after 

punching  holes  in  the  top  and  bottom  of  each  one, 

string  them  together,  pasting  a  scrap  picture  on  each 

one  if  that  added  touch  is  desired. 

Double  Hearts  (Red  cardboard,  scissors,  paste,  strip 
of  red  paper) 
Cut  two  hearts  of  different  sizes.     Then  take  a 


Festival  Occasions  in 

narrow  strip  of  red  paper  measuring  /4  x  I  inch  and 
fold  it  into  thirds.  While  still  folded  attach  one  end 
of  this  paper  to  the  centre  of  the  upper  side  of  the 
large  heart  and  the  other  end  to  the  centre  of  the 
lozver  side  of  the  smaller  heart.  This  unites  the  two, 
one  resting  on  top  of  the  other,  the  paper  acting 
as  a  kind  of  spring  to  raise  one  above  the  other.  In- 
stead of  a  small  heart  a  scrap  picture  may  be  thus 
attached  on  the  larger  heart. 

In  cutting  out  these  hearts  it  may  be  necessary 
first  to  cut  a  pattern  out  of  newspaper,  making  sev- 
eral trials  before  a  satisfactory  model  is  secured. 

Lacy  Valentine  (Gold  or  silver  paper,  white  tissue 

paper,  scrap  pictures,  paste) 

Cut  from  a  sheet  of  gold  or  silver  paper  a  piece 
measuring  5x7  inches.  Fold  this  once  through  the 
middle  so  as  to  make  a  book  of  3^  x  5  inches.  Cut  a 
piece  from  the  tissue  paper  of  3^2  x  5  inches.  Fold 
this  two  or  three  times  and  cut  into  it  tiny  perforations 
— oblongs,  diamonds,  circles,  hearts,  etc.  Then  open 
out  and  observe  the  lacey  effect.  Practice  this  until 
something  pretty  and  dainty  is  secured.  Then  upon 
the  centre  of  the  book  paste  a  scrap  picture  and  at- 
tach the  tissue  paper  by  its  edges  to  the  Valentine 
in  such  a  way  that  the  picture  shows  a  little  between 
the  perforations.  A  narrow  strip  of  stiff  paper  folded 
in  three,  to  give  the  effect  of  a  spring  as  described 
above,  may  be  used  at  each  corner.  Inside  of  the 
booklet  paste  other  pictures  as  fancy  dictates.  Also 
write  therein  some  appropriate  lines. 

Spider-Web   Design    (Gold  or  silver  paper,  Bristol 
board,  scrap  picture,  paste,  scissors) 
Cut  a  circle  of  gold  or  silver  paper,  three  or  four 


ii2  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

inches  in  diameter.  Fold  once,  making  a  semi-circle ; 
fold  once  more  making  a  quarter-circle.  Beginning 
at  the  point  of  the  folded  paper,  make  a  tiny  cut  from 
one  edge  towards  the  other,  but  do  not  cut  the  point 
entirely  off.  Turn  the  paper  and  make  a  second  cut 
parallel  to  the  first  about  ^  inch  away,  the  cut  being 
from  the  other  edge  of  the  paper.  Turn  again  and 
make  a  third  cut.  Each  time  the  cuts  grow  in  length 
owing  to  the  increasing  width  of  the  triangle  or  quar- 
ter-circle. Continue  thus  until  the  circumference  of 
the  folded  circle  is  reached.  Then  open  out  and  you 
have  a  silver  spider-web  effect.  Take  a  square  or 
circle  somewhat  larger  than  the  web,  and  in  its  centre 
paste  a  pretty  bird,  flower,  or  maiden.  Then  paste 
the  web  upon  this  background,  putting  the  paste  along 
the  edges  of  the  web,  but  leaving  the  centre  free,  so 
that  the  child  can  raise  it  and  peer  through  the  slits 
at  the  picture  beneath. 

Let  city  children  send  to  country  cousins  scrap 
pictures,  colored  papers,  etc.,  and  sample  Valentines, 
so  that  their  friends  may  have  the  pleasure  of  making 
and  giving. 

Valentine  Dinner 

SOUP:  Put  into  the  clear  soup  the  noodle  hearts, 
which  may  be  purchased  at  a  grocery  store,  or  have 
a  vegetable  soup,  slicing  the  vegetables  and  cutting 
them  into  little  hearts  with  a  knife. 

MEAT:  Make  chicken  or  beef  croquettes,  mold- 
ing them  like  hearts. 

VEGETABLES  :  Slice  the  boiled  carrots  and  pota- 
toes and  cut  into  heart  shapes. 

BREAD:  Cut  into  hearts. 


Festival  Occasions  113 

SALAD:  Upon  green  lettuce  leaves  place  hearts 
cut  from  beets. 

DESSERT:  Ice  cream  may  be  obtained  in  the 
form  of  a  Cupid  or  something  similar,  and  cake  may 
be  decorated  with  white  icing  having  pink  hearts  out- 
lined upon  it.  The  peppermint  candies  in  the  shape 
of  hearts,  which  have  sentiments  printed  upon  them, 
may  be  passed  either  at  the  beginning  or  the  end  of 
the  meal.  Cut  in  half,  placing  the  halves  in  separate 
dishes ;  then  pass  one  dish  to  the  girls  and  the  other 
to  the  boys,  and  by  matching  halves  partners  may  be 
found.  Let  the  children,  however,  remain  unconscious 
of  the  distinction  of  sex  as  many  years  as  possible. 

In  making  preparations  for  the  dinner  let  the 
children  help. 

Place  Cards  for  Dinner  (Red  paper,  white  cardboard, 

scissors,  pencil} 

Cut  a  heart  from  the  red  paper.  From  the  white, 
cut  an  arrow,  drawing  it  after  a  pattern  found  in 
some  book.  Making  two  slits  in  the  heart,  run  the 
arrow  through  it.  On  the  reverse  side  of  the  heart 
write  the  name  of  the  guest. 

Decorations  for  Valentine  Dinner  (Red  cardboard, 

red  ribbon) 

Cut  about  two  dozen  hearts  all  of  same  size,  or 
graduated  in  size.  String  these  upon  the  red  ribbon 
and  suspend  over  the  table. 

WASHINGTON'S  BIRTHDAY 

Luncheon  Card  (/.  Picture  hatchet,  cardboard,  scis- 
sors, paints;  2,  Same — also  white  or  reddish 
brozvn  paper} 


H4  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

1.  Find  a  picture  of  a  hatchet  and  use  it  as  a 
model  from  which  to  cut  one  about  two  inches  long. 
Paint  this  in  colors  resembling  the  real  hatchet,  and 
upon  the  reverse  side  write  the  name  of  the  guest. 

2.  From  a  piece  of  white  or  reddish-brown  paper 
cut  a  one-inch  square.    Paint  so  as  to  resemble  cherry 
wood.     Roll  so  that  one  edge  overlaps  the  other  a 
trifle,  simulating  the  trunk  of  a  tree.    As  they  overlap 
cut  a  tiny  slit  through  the  two.     Cut  out  a  tiny  card- 
board hatchet,  paint  as  above,  and  insert  in  this  slit 
so  that  it  holds  the  two  edges  together.    Before  fast- 
ening in  this  way,  an  appropriate  quotation  may  be 
written  inside,  and  the  name  of  the  guest  on  the  out- 
side.   It  should  stand  up  if  rightly  made. 

Decorative  Cherries  (Paraffine,  spool  of  wire,  not  too 

fine,  green  cloth  or  paper,  carmine  oil  paint,  brush, 

paste) 

Purchase  at  the  grocer's  cakes  of  paraffine  such 
as  is  used  for  preserving  purposes.  Heat  a  cake  in  a 
dish  so  that  it  is  soft  enough  to  model  into  balls  the 
size  of  a  cherry.  While  still  pliable  make  a  slight 
depression  in  its  surface.  Having  previously  rolled 
the  wire  in  the  green  tissue  paper,  and  cut  into  inch 
strips  for  stems,  insert  this  into  the  cherry  at  the 
depressed  part  of  its  surface.  Cut  out  cherry  leaves 
of  paper,  or  better  dark  green  cloth,  place  a  little  paste 
on  these  leaves  at  the  back  and  arrange  a  stem  on 
each  one.  When  the  stem  of  the  cherry  is  firmly  fast- 
ened in  the  fruit,  paint  the  surface  with  carmine 
oil  paint.  This  gives  a  polished  appearance  to  the 
surface  like  the  natural  cherry. 

The  stems  of  the  green  leaves  may  be  trimmed 
about  the  stems  of  the  cherries  in  twos  or  threes  or 
more,  according  to  the  number  of  cherries  used. 


Festival  Occasions  115 

Paper  Chains  (Colored  paper  in  sheets  or  cut  into 
strips,  paste,  small  brushes  or  sticks) 
The  making  of  paper  chains,  in  contrasting  or 
uniform  colors,  is  a  delightful  pastime  for  children  of 
all   ages.     Very   little   children  may   easily   learn   to 
make  one  loop  at  a  time,  and,  with  assistance,  are  soon 
able  to  fasten  several  loops  together. 

Kindergarten  Supply  Stores  furnish  strips  of 
colored  paper  already  cut,  and  put  up  in  packages. 
These  strips  measure  36  inches  in  length.  It  is  very 
easy,  however,  to  cut  strips  from  large  sheets  of  paper, 
and  it  is  an  excellent  lesson  in  accurate  cutting  for 
children  over  ten  years  of  age. 

These  paper  strips  may  measure  one  or  two  inches 
in  width  and  the  entire  length  of  the  sheet.  Cut  the 
long  strips  into  short  strips  measuring  four  inches  in 
length.  Holding  the  four  inch  strip  in  the  left  hand, 
put  a  very  little  paste  on  the  under  surface  of  one 
end  of  the  strip.  Overlap  the  pasted  end  of  the  strip 
to  its  unpasted  end,  and  hold  firmly  until  fastened. 
You  now  have  one  paper  loop.  Through  this  loop 
is  placed  another  four  inch  strip — the  paste  is  added 
in  the  same  manner.  Now  you  have  two  loops.  Con- 
tinue doing  this  until  you  have  the  chain  the  required 
length.  These  chains  are  very  effective  when  used 
in  decorating. 

For  Washington's  Birthday,  red,  white  and  blue 
paper  would  be  used  for  the  chains. 


Bonbonnieres  (White  tissue  paper,  red  and  blue  ani- 
line dyes) 

Very  attractive  bonbonnieres  may  be  made  by 
cutting  oblong  shaped  sheets  of  white  tissue  paper, 
measuring  6  inches  in  length  and  5  inches  in  width. 


n6  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Fringe  the  shorter  edges  of  the  paper,  making  fringe 
I  inch  deep. 

Dissolve  any  good  red  and  blue  dyes  in  boiling 
water,  and  place  in  separate  dishes.  Dip  one  fringed 
end  of  tissue  paper  into  the  red  dye  for  one  second, 
and  dip  the  other  fringed  end  into  the  blue  dye. 
Shake  these  ends  gently  in  order  to  let  the  water 
drip  from  them.  When  they  are  dry,  place  a  large 
sized  candy  in  the  centre  of  the  paper,  and  gathering 
up  the  fringed  ends,  twist  them  close  to  the  candy, 
thus  forming  a  feathery  effect  in  two  colors.  These 
are  very  pretty  when  arranged  on  the  table  either  in 
quantity  or  singly. 

Tents    (White  shelf  paper,  paste,  match  stick,  red, 

white  and  blue  paper) 

Groups  of  white  tents,  made  of  white  shelf  paper, 
capped  at  the  top  with  tiny  American  flags,  may  be 
placed  at  short  distances  from  the  centre  piece  of  a 
luncheon  or  supper  table  with  good  effect. 

The  large  sheets  of  shelf  paper  may  be  bought 
at  any  grocer's.  Cut  them  into  four-inch  squares. 
Place  the  paper  before  you  on  a  flat  surface,  an  edge 
nearest  you.  Fold  the  front  edge  to  the  back  edge  of 
square ;  crease  the  paper  at  the  fold,  open  the  paper  and 
fold  the  right  edge  to  left  edge  of  square ;  crease  the 
fold  again.  Open  the  paper  and  turn  the  square  so  that 
a  corner  points  towards  you.  Fold  this  front  corner 
to  the  back  corner,  so  that  the  two  points  exactly 
meet. 

Crease  on  the  fold,  open  the  paper,  and  fold  the 
left  corner  to  the  right  corner  of  the  square.  Crease 
on  the  fold.  Open  the  paper;  before  you  you  have 
a  square  of  paper,  with  eight  folds  across  its  surface, 
a  fold  running  front  edge  to  back  edge,  from  right 


Festival  Occasions  117 

edge  to  left  edge,  from  right  corner  to  left  cor- 
ner, from  left  corner  to  right  corner.  Turn  the  square 
of  paper  over  so  that  all  the  folds  on  the  surface  of 
the  paper  are  on  the  upper  side  of  the  square.  Place 
the  square  with  a  corner  toward  you. 

You  will  now  see  eight  folds  running  from  the 
four  edges  and  four  corners  to  the  centre  of  the 
square.  Crease  with  thumb  and  forefinger  of  right  hand 
the  fold  running  from  lower  right  edge  to  centre  of 
square.  Place  this  right  hand  fold  of  square  forward 
so  that  it  lies  along  the  fold  which  extends  from  the 
corner  directly  in  front  of  you  to  the  centre  of  the 
square.  Follow  the  same  directions  in  folding  the 
crease  that  runs  from  the  lower  left  edge  to  centre  of 
square.  These  two  folds  touch  now  on  the  fold  that 
runs  from  front  corner  to  centre  of  square.  You 
will  see  a  small  triangle  extending  below  the  two  folds 
which  thus  meet  in  front  of  you.  Fold  this  small 
triangle  back  toward  the  centre,  and  underneath  the 
two  folds  that  meet  in  front  of  you.  One  half  of  your 
tent  is  folded.  The  same  directions  must  be  followed 
in  folding  the  other  side  of  the  square. 

The  two  small  triangles  must  be  carefully  folded 
so  that  the  tent  will  stand  evenly  when  finished.  You 
will  see  when  the  front  and  back  part  of  the  tent  is 
finished  that  you  have  the  right  and  left  corners  to 
dispose  of.  Fold  these  corners  underneath  the  tent, 
so  that  when  it  is  placed  in  an  upright  position  it  will 
stand  firmly.  To  make  the  tent  stand  well,  crease  the 
edges  that  run  from  the  four  corners  to  top  of  tent, 
thus  making  an  exact  pyramid.  The  use  of  a  little 
paste  in  securing  the  folds  is  of  great  assistance. 

To  represent  the  tent  pole,  a  wooden  match, 
gilded,  may  be  used.  To  this  attach  a  tiny  American 
flag  made  of  pliable  red,  white  and  blue  paper. 


n8  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Paper  Lanterns  (Scissors,  red,  white  and  blue  paper, 

liquid  gold  paint,  box  of  small  candles,  circular* 

box  covers,  baby  ribbon — red,  white  and  blue) 

Lanterns   made  of   red,   white   and  blue  paper, 

each  of  one  color  only,  ornamented  with  gold  paint 

and  tied  with  the  red,  white  and  blue  baby  ribbon, 

are  extremely  pretty  for  supper  decorations.     When 

suspended  from  the  chandelier  above  the  centre  of  a 

supper  table,  a  lighted  candle  in  each  little  lantern, 

the  effect  is  charming. 

In  view  of  entertainments  where  decorations  are 
called  for,  it  would  be  well  to  lay  aside  all  small  cir- 
cular box  covers  that  find  their  way  into  the  house- 
hold. The  small  box  covers  that  measure  2l/z  inches 
in  diameter  may  be  taken  as  a  standard  size.  These 
box  covers  form  the  bottom  of  the  lanterns. 

Cut  from  the  colored  paper  an  oblong  piece  meas- 
uring 8  inches  in  length  and  5  inches  in  width.  Lay 
the  oblong  piece  of  paper  before  you  with  its  long 
edges  running  right  and  left.  Draw  a  pencil  line  the 
length  of  the  paper  ^4  of  an  inch  from  the  upper  edge  ; 
y*,  of  an  inch  from  its  lower  edge  draw  another  line ; 
which  will  be  parallel  to  the  first. 

From  the  upper  pencil  line  to  the  lower  pencil 
line  draw  15  lines  l/2  inch  apart.  These  upright  lines 
will  form  14  narrow  oblongs.  Use  very  sharp  pointed 
scissors,  and  cut  away  each  alternate  oblong.  Paste 
the  two  short  edges  of  the  oblong  paper  together, 
one  end  overlapping  the  other.  The  body  of  the  lan- 
tern is  now  finished. 

Let  a  little  wax  drip  from  a  candle  on  the  inside 
of  the  circular  box  cover  at  its  centre.  When  a 
little  bed  of  soft  wax  is  formed,  place  an  unlighted 
candle  on  it  in  an  upright  position.  Place  a  thick 
coating  of  Spaulding's  glue  on  the  inner  surface  of 


Festival  Occasions  119 

circular  rim  of  the  box  cover,  and  carefully  fit  the 
body  of  the  lantern  into  it. 

When  the  paper  lantern  is  securely  fastened,  gild 
heavily  the  outside  rim  of  the  box  cover  and  the  upper 
and  lower  circular  bands  which  form  top  and  bottom 
borders  of  the  lanterns.  In  the  top  circular  band 
punch  four  holes  equal  distances  apart,  through  which 
the  ribbons  are  run. 


ST.  PATRICK'S  DAY— MARCH    17TH 

Place  Cards  (White  cards,  water-color  or  oil  paints, 

brush) 

Paint  a  picture  of  shamrock  upon  the  card.  It 
may  be  copied  from  some  picture,  if  not  from  the 
real  plant.  If  not  possible  to  find  a  picture,  our  wild- 
wood-sorrel  (Oxalis  acetosella)  is  supposed  to  be 
the  same  as  the  shamrock  and  may  be  used  for  model. 
Some  authorities  believe  the  white  clover  to  be  the 
original  shamrock. 

Flags  (Irish  Hag,  green  paint,  gold  paint,  brush,  scis- 
sors, slender  sticks) 
If  one  Irish  flag  is  bought  the  children  may  copy 

it,   painting  a  number,  one   for  each  guest,  or   for 

decorating  table.     Glue  flags  to  sticks. 

Ribbon  Flags   (Green  satin  ribbon,  one  inch  wide, 

wooden  toothpick) 

Cut  the  ribbon  into  oblongs  to  make  wee  flags. 
Glue  to  tiny  flagsticks  and  put  at  places  at  dinner 
table. 

Shamrock  Plants 
The  real  shamrock  is  now  brought  over  and  may 


1 20  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

be  purchased  in  March.  A  little  plant  makes  an  ap- 
priate  souvenir.  Or  several  weeks  before  the  day, 
children  may  plant  shamrock  seed  in  tiny  pots  for 
use  on  the  I7th. 

Potato  Race 

A  potato  race  is  an  appropriate  game  for  St.  Pat- 
rick's Day.  (See  page  94.)  Give  cork  doll  for  prize 
to  winner  of  race  (page  81),  as  souvenir  from  Cork. 

St.  Patrick's  Dinner 

Have  as  many  green  vegetables  and  side  dishes 
as  possible.  Spinach  will  color  the  soup.  Green  veg- 
etables and  salads  are  easy  to  obtain  and  ice  cream 
may  be  colored  with  pistache.  Irish  flags  may  be  sus- 
pended over  the  table. 

Dinner  Souvenir  (Blotting  paper,  souvenir  postcards, 

green  ribbon  ^2  inch  wide) 

Give  each  guest  a  blotter  made  thus :  Buy  sou- 
venir postcards  with  pictures  of  Killarney  and  other 
Irish  views.  Cut  the  blotting  paper  into  sheets  of 
same  size  as  cards.  Place  together.  Punch  hole  at 
one  end  and  tie  together  with  ribbon. 


EASTER 
Egg  Shell  Garden  (See  page  25) 

Sponge  Garden   (Small,  clean  sponge,  birdseed) 

A  few  days  before  Easter,  sprinkle  the  sponge 
with  birdseed.  Keep  damp  and  the  seeds  will  sprout 
and  cover  the  sponge  with  growing  blades  of  green. 


Festival  Occasions  121 

Easter  Eggs   (/.  Diamond  dyes,  a  dozen  eggs.     2. 
Small  figured  calico,  lye,  boiling  water) 

1.  Boil  the  eggs  hard  and  dye  with  the  colors 
according  to   directions  on  package,   which  may  be 
had  at  drugstore,  price  five  cents. 

2.  Wind  strips  of  the  bright  calico  around  the 
eggs  and  boil  in  water  strongly  saturated  with  lye. 
The  lye  extracts  the  color,  which  will  be  found  printed 
upon  the  eggs. 

Place  Cards  for  Easter  Breakfast  (i.    White  paper, 
scissors,  paints.    2.   Plain  white  cards,  paints) 

1.  If  possible  secure  a  real  Easter  lily  for  a  model. 
If  this  cannot  be  obtained,  a  picture  of  one  will  an- 
swer.    From  the  paper  cut,  freehand,  if  possible,  the 
shape  of  the  lily  and  paint  it  "'.htly;  just  a  little  shad- 
ing and  the  golden  center,     j'lace  the  guest's  name 
upon  the  reverse  side.     It  may  be  necessary  to  draw 
the  lily  first  before  cutting,  but  the  freehand  cutting 
is  a  good  exercise. 

2.  Decorate  a  white  card  with  the  picture  of  a 
lily,  or  a  tulip,  using  water-color  paints.     Below  the 
flower  write  an  appropriate  flower  motto. 

Celluloid  Place  Cards  (White  celluloid,  scissors,  pen- 

«/) 

Get  from  a  dictionary  or  natural  history  a  good 
picture  of  a  butterfly  with  open  wings.  Draw  a  pat- 
tern from  this  and  then  outline  a  number  of  these  on 
the  celluloid  and  cut  out.  These  dainty,  spirit-like  but- 
terflies will  make  suitable  place-cards,  having  the  name 
of  guest  on  the  reverse  side. 

Cut  Easter  lily  of  celluloid  in  same  way. 


122  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Easter  Chicken  (Yellow  worsted,  black  beads,  quill 
toothpick,  cardboard,  wooden  toothpicks,  or  pic- 
ture-wire.) 

Make  a  yellow  ball  as  described  on  pages  96-7  for 
the  body  of  the  chicken.  A  smaller  ball  makes  the 
head.  Sew  on  the  beads  for  the  bright  black  eyes; 
cut  the  quill  into  shape  of  a  bill  and  sew  into  place. 
Let  wooden  toothpicks  form  the  legs;  or,  better  still, 
take  picture-wire  made  of  several  strands.  Wind  some 
of  this  around  the  body,  letting  the  ends  of  the  wire 
extend  about  il/2  inches  below  the  body;  sew  to  the 
body  to  keep  in  place.  Then  pick  out  the  ends  of 
the  wire  a  little  to  suggest  toes  and  wind  the  legs 
with  worsted.  Sew  chicken  to  a  card. 

Easter  Card  (Parquetry  circles  used  in  kindergarten, 
paste,  gray  card,  scissors} 

The  little  child  may  make  an  Easter  card  by 
pasting  upon  a  neutral-tinted  card  pictures  of  tulips 
made  of  the  kindergarten  parquetry  papers.  Cut  in 
half  either  red  or  yellow  circles.  Place  so  that  the 
lower  ends  touch  and  the  upper  ones  are  a  little 
apart,  suggesting  a  tulip.  A  strip  of  green  paper  will 
represent  the  stem  and  an  older  child  can  cut  leaves 
of  the  green  paper  and  paste  on.  Have  a  real  tulip 
from  which  to  copy.  Child  may  give  this  to  Father 
on  Easter  morning. 

Toy  Screen  (See  page  63) 

Make  dainty  screen  as  described,  and  paste  on 
each  panel  a  tiny  Easter  picture  (Perry  pictures  may 
be  had  by  addressing  firm  in  N.  Y.  City).  Give  to 
Mother  on  Easter  morning. 

Church  Window  Transparency  (See  page  77) 


Festival  Occasions  123 


MEMORIAL  DAY 

We  give  no  special  suggestions  for  the  celebration 
of  Memorial  or  Decoration  Day.  The  ideas  given 
under  the  headings  of  the  other  patriotic  holidays,  as 
Washington's  Birthday  and  Fourth  of  July,  may  be 
used  also  for  this  holiday,  but  it  is  not  a  day  for  mere 
play. 

If  the  parents  plan  to  go  to  the  cemetery  let  the 
child  accompany  them  and  carry  flowers,  preferably 
those  of  his  own  raising  or  plucking. 

Reading 

It  would  be  well  also  on  this  day  to  read  some 
great  piece  of  patriotic  literature,  either  prose  or 
poetry,  which  will  help  the  older  children  to  realize 
the  great  debt  which  we  owe  to  the  preservers  of  our 
country,  to  whom  we  dedicate  this  day.  Lincoln's 
Gettysburg  address  should  be  read.  Also  Lowell's 
"The  Present  Crisis."  "Bugle  Echoes,"  compiled  by 
Francis  F.  Browne,  contains  150  poems  of  the  Civil 
War,  both  Northern  and  Southern. 

Badge  (Sheets  of  red,  white,  and  blue  paper,  scissors, 

paste} 

A  simple  badge  may  be  made  for  the  children  to 
wear  in  this  fashion: 

1.  Cut  a  circle  fy  inches  in  diameter  out  of  the 
red  paper.     Cut  also  from  the  red,  white  and  blue 
sheets  strips  of  2  x  5  inches.     Paste  the  three  strips 
together  at  the  upper  end  like  ribbons,  letting  them 
spread  a  little  apart  at  the  lower  end.    Paste  the  circle 
at  the  upper  end  to  finish  off. 

2.  Another  style  may  be  made  by  placing  the 


124  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

three  colors  so  that  one  lies  directly  above  the  other. 
In  this  case  the  blue  is  5  inches  long,  the  white  four 
inches,  and  the  red  three  inches.  Fasten  to  dress  or 
coat  with  a  safety  pin. 


INDEPENDENCE    DAY 

Firecrackers  (Red  paper,  hemp  string, 

Get  large  sheets  of  red  paper  to  be  found  at 
department  stores  or  wholesale  paper  houses,  measur- 
ing about  35  inches  in  length  and  26  inches  in  width. 
From  each  one  cut  thirteen  2-inch  strips,  cutting  the 
length  of  the  sheet.  Fold  each  strip  once  across  the 
width  of  the  strip,  and  cut  through  the  center  at  the 
fo!d.  This  gives  twenty-six  2-inch  strips  of  paper, 
the  width  of  the  small  sized  firecrackers. 

Hold  a  strip  of  paper  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  the  left  hand.  Moisten  the  thumb  of 
the  right  hand  a  very  little,  and  roll  the  end  of  the 
strip  towards  the  left,  as  one  does  in  rolling  a  paper 
taper.  Keep  the  strip  rolled  tightly  until  the  other 
end  of  the  strip  is  reached.  If  the  cracker  seems  too 
loosely  rolled  unroll  it  a  short  distance,  and  gently 
pull  the  strip  into  form  again. 

Place  a  little  paste  on  the  under  side  of  the  loose 
end  of  the  strip,  and  press  the  pasted  end  firmly  on 
the  rolled  surface  of  the  cracker.  Hold  this  until  it 
adheres  to  the  surface  of  the  cracker.  Cut  the  hemp 
string  into  three-inch  pieces.  Dip  one  end  of  the 
string  into  the  paste,  then  insert  this  pasted  end  into 
one  end  of  the  cracker  at  the  little  opening  which  is 
found  at  the  very  center.  Hold  this  firmly  for  a  mo- 
ment, or  until  the  string  is  securely  fastened. 

Tie  six  or  eight  firecrackers  into  bunches  with 


Festival  Occasions  125 

red,  white  and  blue  ribbons,  and  lay  them  over  the 
white  surface  of  the  luncheon  or  supper  table. 

Firecracker  Card  (See  page  55) 

Drums    (Small    wooden    boxes,    liquid    gold    paint, 
Spaulding's  glue,  red,  white  and  blue  baby  rib- 
bon, small  sticks  for  drum  sticks) 
The  market  basket  will,  from  time  to  time,  fur- 
nish the  housekeeper  with  small  circular  boxes  labeled : 
Electro-Silicon   Silver  Polish.     These  wooden  boxes, 
measuring  8  inches  in  circumference  and   12  inches 
in  height,  make,  when  prettily  ornamented,  very  at- 
tractive drums. 

Remove  the  cover  of  box,  and  place  on  its  inner 
rim  a  coating  of  Spaulding's  glue.  Place  the  cover 
on  the  box  again,  and  put  aside  until  it  is  fastened. 
Place  the  box  on  a  sheet  of  stiff  white  paper,  and 
holding  it  firmly,  draw  a  pencil  line  around  its  edge. 
Now  remove  the  box,  and  you  will  see  that  you  have 
outlined  a  circle.  Using  this  circle  as  a  model,  draw 
a  second  circle.  Cut  out  these  circles,  following  the 
pencil  very  accurately.  These  two  circles  form  the 
two  heads  of  the  drum,  and  are  to  be  pasted  on  the 
top  and  the  bottom  of  the  box.  Gild  the  circular  sur- 
face of  the  box.  Cut  strips  of  red  or  blue  paper, 
measuring  &1/.  inches  in  length  and  i]/2  inches  in 
width.  Brush  the  under  surface  of  these  strips  with 
paste,  and  place  one  strip  at  the  top  and  one  at  the 
bottom  of  the  drum,  ft  of  an  inch  above  the  rim  of 
the  drum.  These  strips  answer  to  the  wooden  bands 
which  hold  the  drum  heads  in  place.  Red,  white  and 
blue  baby  ribbon  may  be  carried  from  the  upper  to  the 
lower  edges  of  the  drum  if  desired  to  represent  the 
cords  which  hold  the  drum  securely. 


126  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Little  wooden  sticks,  gilded  and  tied  at  the  side 
of  the  drum  form  the  drumsticks. 

The  smaller  Electro-Silicon  boxes,  measuring  2^4 
inches  in  circumference  and  iy$  inches  in  height,  may 
be  used  in  the  same  way. 

Rosettes  (Red,  white  and  blue  tissue  paper,  a  strong 

needle,  white  sewing  silk,  white  library  paste  or 

well-made  Hour  paste) 

Lay  nine  sheets  of  tissue  paper  one  upon  another, 
alternating  the  colors,  red,  white  and  blue.  Fold 
these  sheets  together  very  smoothly  once,  thus  mak- 
ing 1 8  smaller  sheets  if  they  were  cut  apart,  but  do 
not  cut.  Lay  a  silver  dollar  or  fifty-cent  piece  (de- 
pending upon  the  size  required)  at  the  upper  left- 
hand  corner  of  paper.  Draw  a  pencil  line  around  the 
rim  of  the  silver  piece.  Move  the  piece  of  money  to 
the  right  and  draw  another  circle.  Continue  this 
drawing  circles  until  you  have  covered  the  surface  of 
the  paper. 

Thread  a  needle  with  the  sewing  silk,  knot  the 
end  of  the  thread  and  take  several  firm  stitches 
through  the  center  of  each  circle  in  order  to  hold  the 
sheets  of  paper  together.  With  sharp  scissors  cut 
out  each  paper  circle,  and  fringe  by  cutting,  but  not 
too  finely,  from  the  edge  to  within  y&  of  an  inch  of 
the  center  of  the  circle.  Hold  the  knot  on  the  under 
side  of  the  circle  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
of  the  left  hand.  Slightly  moisten  the  forefinger  of 
the  right  hand  and  brush  gently  over  the  fringed 
surface  toward  the  center  of  the  rosette.  At  the  back 
of  each  rosette  put  a  bit  of  paste,  then  lay  rosettes 
on  strips  of  paper  one  inch  in  width.  Do  not  overlap 
the  rosettes,  but  arrange  to  allow  the  edges  to  touch. 

These  strips  of  rosettes  may  be  used  as  festoons. 


Festival  Occasions  127 

As  decorations  for  cakes  or  dishes  of  fruit  they  can 
be  used  most  effectively. 

Shields  for  Luncheon  Cards  (Cardboard,  red  and 
blue  paper,  baby  ribbon — red,  white  and  blue, 
gold  paint,  water-color  paints — red  and  blue) 
Attractive  luncheon  or  supper  cards,  suitable  for 
patriotic  occasions,  may  be  made  in  the  form  of 
shields.  Turn  to  the  fourth  page  of  Webster's  Un- 
abridged Dictionary,  and  find  the  shield  used  as  the 
American  Coat-of-Arms.  This  shield,  enlarged  to  a 
size  measuring  2l/>  inches  in  length  and  2l/2  inches 
in  width  across  the  upper  part,  forms  an  excellent 
model.  If  one  does  not  draw  habitually,  use  tracing 
paper  when  tracing  the  pattern.  If  one  uses  water- 
color  paints  successfully,  paint  the  deep  blue  band 
across  the  upper  part  of  the  shield,  and  the  twelve 
red  stripes  running  from  the  band  to  the  lower  edge 
of  the  shield.  For  those  who  do  not  paint,  dark  red 
and  blue  paper  may  be  substituted  very  successfully. 
A  touch  of  gold  paint  on  the  edge  of  the  shield  adds 
greatly  to  the  effect. 

Write  each  guest's  name  on  a  card  measuring  2l/z 
inches  in  length  and  il/2  inches  in  width.  Attach  a 
card  by  means  of  red,  white  and  blue  ribbon  to  upper 
corner  of  each  shield. 

Rockets  (Red,  zvhite  and  blue  paper,  paste,  gold  paint, 

slender  ivooden  sticks) 

Rockets  are  made  in  the  same  manner  as  fire- 
crackers, excepting  that  the  paper  strips  are  cut  wider, 
viz. :  3  or  4  inches  in  width,  and  more  strips  are  re- 
quired to  give  the  proper  size.  This  may  be  left  to 
the  maker's  discretion. 

When  the  rockets  are  rolled  and  pasted  after  the 


128  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

manner  of  the  firecrackers,  insert  the  sharp  point  of 
a  pencil  into  the  center  of  one  end  of  each  roll,  and 
gently  push  out  this  center  to  the  distance  of  two 
inches.  This  will  give  the  pointed  end  of  the  rocket. 
These  pointed  ends  may  be  gilded,  as  well  as  the  slen- 
der sticks  which  are  inserted  at  the  other  ends. 


LABOR  DAY 

The  words  "parade"  and  "procession"  are  as- 
sociated in  the  minds  of  most  American  children  with 
long  lines  of  soldiers,  and  the  small  boy  will  play  for 
hours  putting  his  tin  soldiers  in  rank  and  file,  or 
inarching  with  his  comrades,  with  pans  for  drums. 

In  these  later  days,  when  the  spirit  of  the  Peace 
Congress  is  in  the  air,  it  is  well  that  the  children 
should  become  interested  in  struggles  and  battles  of 
a  different  and  higher  order  and  in  the  parades  in 
which  long  lines  of  honorable  workers  take  part. 

In  this  country  all  self-respecting  people  are 
workers  in  one  way  or  another,  and  though  in  the 
course  of  progress  of  cooperative  movements  and  com- 
binations, among  many  kinds  of  workers,  there  may 
have  been  much  of  injustice,  such  movements  have 
also  been  accompanied  by  self-sacrifice,  courage  and 
generosity  of  a  high  order.  In  time  the  good  will 
far  out-weigh  the  evil.  As  Labor  Day  approaches,  the 
children,  especially  if  the  father  expects  to  take  part, 
will  be  readily  interested  in  the  day  and  what  it 
should  mean — the  solving  of  the  great  problem  of 
the  twentieth  century.  Meanwhile  let  the  children 
feel  the  beauty  of  Walt  Whitman's  lines: 


Festival  Occasions  129 

"Ah  little  recks  the  laborer 
How  near  his  work  is  holding  him  to  God, 
The  loving  Laborer  through  space  and  time." 

The  Labor  Day  parade  is  a  revival,  or  survival 
in  modern  guise,  of  the  mediaeval  processions  of  the 
Guilds.  Such  a  procession  is  charmingly  represented 
in  Wagner's  delightful  opera,  "Die  Meistersinger," 
wherein,  on  a  festival  day,  we  see  the  bakers  enter, 
bearing  the  insignia  of  their  trade,  enormous  pretzels 
and  other  cakes.  The  cobblers  march  in  with  gigantic 
boots  and  slippers  suspended  from  tall  poles ;  the 
butchers  carry  hams  and  festoons  of  sausages,  etc. 
The  child  may  imitate  such  a  parade  in  his  play. 

In  talking  with  the  child,  emphasize  the  obliga- 
tion to  do  good,  true  work  and  to  take  pride  in  such. 
Let  fidelity  and  trustworthiness  be  his  watchwords. 

Parade  (Poles  or  broom  handles,  wrapping  paper  or 

newspaper,    scissors,    tacks,    rakes,   spades,    etc., 

flags  and  banners) 

Let  the  children  cut  from  the  paper  large  out- 
lines of  shoes,  boots,  hams,  saws,  try-squares,  clocks, 
watches,  enormous  pens,  knives,  forks,  etc.,  and  fasten 
with  pins  or  tacks  to  the  poles.  Then  march  to  the 
tune  of  some  stirring  air. 

Some  may  be  able  to  secure  small  garden  rakes, 
spades  and  toy  brooms  to  carry.  The  American  flag 
and  banners  should  also  be  carried. 

Toy- Processions   (Trade  catalogues,  toothpicks,  pa- 
per dolls,  etc.) 

Cut  out  paper  dolls  and  let  each  one  carry  a  tiny 
toothpick  upon  which  has  been  pasted  a  picture  cut 
from  some  catalogue.  These  catalogues  will  furnish 


1 30  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

pictures  of  shoes,  carriages,  saws,  hammers,  watches, 
furniture,  etc.  Be  sure  that  little  American  flags  are 
also  carried.  Dolls  may  be  glued  to  spools  for  stand- 
ards. 


Place  Cards  for  Dinner 

1.  (Bristol  board,  scissors,  paints,  brush) 
Make  place  cards  of  Bristol  board,  which  may 

be  cut  into  shape  of  shoes,  watches,  etc.,  and  painted 
accordingly.  The  name  of  guest  may  be  placed  on 
reverse  side.  Or,  on  plain  white  card,  paint  a  picture 
emblematic  of  a  trade  and  write  upon  it  also  some 
quotation  from  a  writer  of  democratic  spirit. 

2.  (Tiny  cast-iron  rakes,  spades  and  hatchets — 
/  cent  each.) 

As  a  souvenir,  give  each  guest  a  tiny  cast-iron 
spade,  rake  and  hatchet  tied  together  with  cord.  Or, 
for  a  joke,  these  may  be  placed  by  each  plate  instead  of 
knife,  fork  and  spoon. 

3.  (Pen  and  ink  or  pencil,  white  card.) 

Draw  on  a  plain,  white  card  a  picture  of  an  ant, 
bee  or  beaver  as  emblematic  of  labor.  Use  for  place 
cards. 

4.  (Frances  S.  Osgood's  poem,  "Labor,"  white 
cards,  pen  and  ink.} 

On  each  card  write  one  stanza  of  this  beautiful 
poem,  and  after  the  close  of  the  meal  let  each  guest 
in  turn  read  the  lines  on  his  card.  It  would  be  well 
for  every  child  to  commit  this  poem  to  memory.  It 
is  long,  but  sings  itself  easily  into  the  mind.  The 
word-pictures  it  calls  up  are  exquisite  and  the  learn- 
ing of  it,  little  by  little,  would  not  be  an  unhappy  task. 


Festival  Occasions  131 


HALLOWE'EN 

This  is  the  festival  which  is  given  over  to  all 
kinds  of  merry  pranks  and  is  dearly  loved  by  the  chil- 
dren. It  is  an  opportunity  to  teach  them  to  discrimi- 
nate between  the  fun  which  is  kindly  and  that  which 
is  malicious  and  productive  of  needless  pain. 

Ducking  for  Apples  and  Nuts  (Large  pans  or  tubs, 

apples,  nuts,  pennies') 

Let  the  children,  young  and  old,  for  once  get 
themselves  wet,  if  necessary,  in  ducking  for  the  nuts 
and  apples  floating  in  the  water.  With  a  little  suc- 
tion some  of  the  children  will  be  able  to  get  pennies 
from  the  bottom  of  the  tub. 

Fortune-Telling 

1.  With  Needles.     (Needles,  pan  of  water) 
Name  a  needle  for  yourself  and  one  for  a  friend, 

and  put  in  the  water,  but  not  together.  If  they  move 
safely  across,  it  betokens  good  luck.  Two  needles 
meeting  indicate  life  partnership. 

2.  With  Toy  Ships.     (Pan  of  water,  nut  ships  as 
described  on  page  22) 

Name  one  little  vessel  for  yourself  and  one  for  a 
friend  and  set  them  afloat.  If  they  come  to  port  on 
the  other  side  all  is  well. 

3.  With  Apple  Rinds.     (Apple,  knife) 

Pare  an  apple  so  that  the  skin  comes  off  in  one 
long  piece.  Toss  over  the  head  upon  the  floor,  and 
the  form  it  takes  will  give  the  initial  letters  of  the  name 
of  one's  future  mate. 


132  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

4.  With  Cake.    (Cake,  thimble,  ring,  penny,  etc.) 

Bake  a  cake,  hiding  in  the  dough  a  thimble,  a 
ring  and  a  penny.  When  cut,  the  recipient  of  the  ring 
is  fore-doomed  to  marriage;  the  one  getting  the  thim- 
ble will  be  a  spinster ;  the  one  receiving  the  penny  will 
have  the  pleasures  and  responsibilities  of  wealth. 

Apple-Biting    Contest     (Apple    suspended    front    a 
string') 

1.  The   apple   is   set   swinging  and   two   people, 
standing  opposite  each  other,  try  as  it  passes  to  seize 
and  hold  it  in  the  mouth.  They  must  not  touch  it  with 
the  hands. 

2.  Tie  an  apple  by  its  stem  to  the  middle  of  a 
string  about  a  yard  long.    Then  two  people,  each  tak- 
ing one  end  of  the  string  in  the  mouth,  begin,  at  a 
signal,  to  gather  it  as  fast  as  possible  into  the  mouth, 
and  so  to  reach  the  apple.     This  belongs  to  the  one 
reaching  it  first. 

Refreshments 

Apples,  nuts,  popcorn,  cider,  gingerbread  and 
doughnuts  are  suitable  for  lighter  refreshments. 
Baked  beans  and  plain  ice-cold  rice  pudding  were 
once  eaten  with  decided  relish  at  a  New  York  City 
Hallowe'en  party,  the  city  people  evidently  enjoying 
the  contrast  between  this  feast  and  the  usual  caterer's 
service.  Serve  fruit  from  a  kettle  suspended  from 
three  cross-sticks,  a  la  witch. 

Decorations 

Jack-o'-lanterns  of  pumpkins ;  strings  of  apples, 
popcorn  and  cranberries,  and  toy  brooms  hung  here 
and  there,  as  reminders  of  the  witches  who  are  said 


Festival  Occasions  133 

to  be  abroad,  will  add  to  the  occasion.    The  pumpkins 
should  be  cut  to  resemble  skulls. 

Reading 

Have  some  one  read  "Tarn  O'Shanter's  Mare" 
(Burns)  ;  also  some  good  ghost  story.  Thomas  Ken- 
drick  Bangs'  "Ghosts  Which  I  Have  Met"  contains 
some  good  stories,  all  absurd.  Choose  a  good  reader 
for  this. 

Place  Cards 

1.  (White  or  tinted  cards,  Palmer  Cox  Brownies, 
ink,  pen} 

The  Brownies  are  delightfully  funny  little  people 
without  a  suggestion  of  anything  coarse  or  evil.  The 
children  love  them.  Let  the  older  ones  copy  and  cut 
them  out  to  use  as  invitation  cards  for  the  Hallowe'en 
party  or  for  place  cards. 

2.  (See  "Pricking,"  page  165.) 

Since  witches  are  always  associated  with  the 
pricking  of  pins,  this  is  an  appropriate  occasion  for 
using  the  kindergarten  pricking.  Outline  some  of  the 
Brownies  on  tinted  cards  and  prick  as  directed  on 
page  165. 

3.  (See    Pumpkin    Jack-o'-lantern    cards,    page 
I35-) 

THANKSGIVING 

Place  Cards  (White  paper  or  cardboard,  brush  and 

paints  or  pen  and  ink) 

i.  Cut  out  a  turkey,  copying  from  some  picture 
if  necessary.  (Picture  may  be  found  in  dictionary. ) 


134  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

If  skilful  with  brush  or  pen,   indicate  the   feathers, 
eye,  etc. 

2.  Draw  picture  of  a  pumpkin.    Cut  it  out.    Paint 
in  deep  orange  tones  with  shadings  of  brown.    Cut  into 
it  eyes,  nose  and  mouth,  suggesting  Jack-o'-lantern. 

3.  On  white  cards  write  stanzas  from  Whittier's 
poem,  "The  Pumpkin  Pie,"  and  let  each  guest  read 
his  stanza  in  turn. 

4.  Cut  as  many  triangles  as  there  are  guests  and 
paint  each  to  resemble  a  slice  of  pie.     One  side  of 
triangle  should  be  curved. 

5.  Find  a  simple  figure  of  a  Puritan  maiden  and 
draw  in  outline ;  then  cut  out  and  paint  or  draw  in 
black  ink  the  important  lines.    Use  as  place  card. 

6.  Make  little  walnut  boats   (see  page  22),  and 
on  each  sail  write  name  of  guest. 

7.  Find  picture  of  Mayflower  and  copy  on  white 
card.    On  reverse  side  write  a  stanza  of  "The  Break- 
ing Waves  Dashed  High."     Let  each  guest  read  his 
lines.      (Or  parts  of  "Hiawatha"   about   Mondamin 
may  be  used.) 

Table  Souvenirs   (Tiny  cast-iron  gardening  tools,  i 

cent  each) 

As  described  under  Labor  Day,  these  tiny  penny 
tools  may  be  put  at  each  place,  the  hatchet  represent- 
ing the  knife,  the  rake  the  fork,  and  the  spade  the 
spoon.  Attach  name  of  guest  to  set. 

Butter  Modeling  (Clay  modeling  tools,  firm  butter) 

If  any  child  has  acquired  a  little   skill   in  clay 

modeling,  let  him  try  his  hand  at  modeling  out  of 

firm   butter    some    form   expressing   a   Thanksgiving 


Festival  Occasions  135 

thought.     It  may  be  a  piece  of  fruit,  or  some  animal. 
Get  clay  modeling  tools  at  art  store. 

Center  Piece  (Pumpkin,  knife,  fruits  and  vegetables) 
Hollow  out  a  pumpkin  in  such  a  way  that  a  part 
of  the  rind  is  left  as  a  handle  to  the  remaining  part, 
which  serves  as  a  basket.  Into  this  basket  put  a 
variety  of  fruits  and  vegetables,  emblematic  of  the 
bounties  for  which  we  are  grateful. 

Jack-o'-lantern  (Pumpkin,  knife,  candle) 

We  doubt  if  any  boy  needs  to  be  told  how  to  cut 
a  face  in  a  pumpkin.  A  sharp  knife  will  soon  make 
the  cuts  for  eyes,  nose  and  mouth  in  the  rind,  the 
seedy  contents  having  been  previously  removed.  A 
hollow  may  be  cut  in  the  bottom  of  the  interior  to  hold 
the  candle,  which  can  be  made  still  steadier  by  melting 
a  little  from  the  bottom  and  letting  it  drip  into  this 
hollow,  forming  a  waxy  bed  into  which  the  candle 
may  be  inserted. 

Candlesticks 

See  pages  24  and  64  for  those  made  of  apples 
and  of  cardboard  and  colored  papers. 

Room  Decorations 

1.  Corn  Stalks.     (Strong  cord  and  needle,  ham- 
mer and  tacks.) 

Stack  cornstalks  in  the  corners  of  the  rooms  in 
effective  positions,  two  or  three  to  a  corner.  Those 
living  in  cities  may  find  it  well  to  secure  these  from 
farmer  friends  some  time  before  the  holiday. 

2.  Unhusked  Ears  of  Field  Corn.    (Strong  cord.) 
The  corn  husks  must  be  turned  back  from  the 

ears  and  cut  off  from  them  without  loosening  the  sepa- 


136  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

rate  leaves.  Then  a  number  of  these  husks  may  be 
strung  upon  a  strong  thread  or  string  alternating 
with  the  ears  of  corn.  Hang  along  the  upper  part  of 
the  wall  as  a  frieze.  The  rich,  warm  tones  of  the 
brown  and  yellow  are  very  effective. 

3.  Cranberries    and    Brussels    Sprouts.     (String, 
needle.) 

Run  upon  a  string  half  a  dozen  cranberries,  then 
a  Brussels  sprout;  then  more  cranberries,  etc.,  and 
suspend  this  as  a  festoon  along  mantelshelf,  in  chan- 
delier, or  over  window. 

4.  Autumn  Leaves.     (See  page  47.) 

5.  Autumn  Boughs.     (Oak  boughs.) 

Oak  boughs,  with  the  rich  red  and  russet  leaves 
still  upon  them,  are  very  handsome  in  the  autumn. 
The  beautiful  branches  may  be  gathered  by  the  young 
people  and  hung  in  parts  of  the  room  where  most 
effective. 


CHRISTMAS 
Place  Cards 

1.  (Sheet  black  paper,  Chinese  white  water-color 
paint,  brush.)     Cut  a  stocking  from  the  black  paper 
(obtainable    at    kindergarten    supply    store).      With 
the  paint,  paint  in  white  toes  and  heels.     On  the  re- 
verse side  write  some  appropriate  quotation  and  name 
of  guest.     Stockings  may  be  about  four  inches  long. 

2.  (White  paper,   black  ink  or  crayon.)     Cut  a 
rough  figure  of  a  snowman  out  of  white  paper,  put  in 
features  with  black  ink  or  crayon,  and  write  name  on 
reverse  side. 

3.  (Water  paper,  water-colors,  scissors,  spray  of 
holly.)     From  real  holly  or  a  picture  of  same,  paint  a 


Festival  Occasions  137 

spray  of  green  leaves  and  red  berries.    Cut  out  around 
the  edges  and  use  as  name  card. 

4.  (Red  cardboard,  scissors,  pen,  ink.)  Draw  an 
outline  of  a  bell  on  cardboard  and  cut  out.  An  appro- 
priate sentiment  may  be  written  upon  one  side  and 
name  of  guest  upon  the  other. 

Surprise  Nuts  (See  page  23) 
Snowflakes  for  Tree  (See  page  59) 

Snowball  (White  cotton  batting,  snowftake  crystals 
from  toy  store,  white  cotton  cloth,  sewing  thread, 
mucilage) 

Cut  two  circles  of  cotton  cloth,  stuff  with  the  bat- 
ting, after  sewing  into  shape  of  ball.  Cover  lightly 
with  snowflake  crystals,  first  dipping  ball  lightly  into 
thin  mucilage.  Suspend  from  tree. 

Candles  (Paraffine  or  old  candles,  kettle,  soft  cotton 

string,  small  box  of  sand,  pencil) 

Candles  have  sometimes  been  made  in  the  kinder- 
garten in  either  of  the  following  ways : 

I.  Heat  a  pound  of  paraffine  (bought  at  grocer's), 
or  melt  up  some  old  candle  ends  in  a  kettle.  Place  in 
front  of  the  child  a  cigar  box  containing  about  a 
quart  of  moist  sand,  smoothed  level.  Then  with  his 
pencil  let  him  press  into  the  sand,  making  a  deep,  hol- 
low mold  just  the  width  of  the  pencil.  Now  let  him 
hold  a  short  piece  of  string  so  that  it  hangs  down  into 
this  mold.  An  older  person  will  then  pour  some  of 
the  melted  wax  into  the  mold.  It  will  cling  to  the 
string,  and  in  a  moment  or  two  will  cool  enough  to  be 
drawn  out,  making  a  little  candle  that  can  be  used  for 


138  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

the  Christmas  tree,  or  put  into  a  clay  candlestick,  also 
made  by  the  child.     (See  below.) 

2.  Put  the  kettle  containing  the  melted  wax  before 
the  child  and  let  him  dip  into  it  a  piece  of  string  about 
four  inches  long.  Then  let  him  take  it  out  in  a  mo- 
ment and  lay  it  aside  to  cool.  A  very  little  wax  will 
cling  to  it.  Meanwhile  he  dips  in  another  string  and 
puts  aside  to  cool.  When  cool  he  takes  up  the  first 
one  and  dips  it  in  a  second  time,  and  a  new  coat  of 
wax  adheres.  He  proceeds  thus  until  the  candles  are 
as  large  in  diameter  as  desired  (about  YT.  inch  at  base). 
The  candles  may  be  put  into  clay  candlesticks,  also 
made  by  the  child. 

Candlesticks  (Clay,  a  tin  or  china  candlestick  to  use 

as  model) 

Let  the  child  take  a  candlestick  and  copy  in  clay ; 
it  should  be  of  simple  form,  a  mere  cylinder,  with 
just  enough  of  a  base  to  make  a  firm  standard. 

Candlesticks  (Cardboard,  scissors} 

Cut  small  squares  of  cardboard.  The  candles  may 
be  made  to  stand  temporarily  upon  these  by  melting 
the  lower  ends  of  the  candles  and  letting  some  of  the 
wax  drip  upon  center  of  the  cards,  and  then  pressing 
the  candle  down  upon  the  melted  wax.  These  may 
be  placed  upon  the  table  on  Christmas  morning. 

Christmas  Carols 

Let  the  children  learn  some  simple  old  carol,  as 
a  secret,  and  Christmas  morning  have  them  sing  it 
softly  and  sweetly  to  awaken  father.  A  full  pro- 
gram of  songs  suitable  for  this  most  beautiful  of  days 
will  be  found  in  the  little  book,  "The  Children's  Mes- 
siah," compiled  by  Mari  Ruef  Hofer,  price  20  cents. 


Festival  Occasions  139 

It  gives  also  the  address  of  a  firm  publishing  stereop- 
ticon  views  for  illustrating  the  program  suggested. 

Spider-Web  Party  (See  page  104) 

Arrange  the  twines  of  several  colors  as  described 
on  page  104,  and  at  the  end  place  the  gifts  belonging 
to  each  child. 

Popcorn  (Popcorn,  popper,  thread,  needle) 

Pop  the  corn  and  string  into  festoons  with  which 
to  decorate  the  tree. 

Christmas   Bells    (Red   cardboard,   scissors,    thread, 

needle) 

Make  bells  as  described  on  page  109,  only  make 
them  of  various  sizes.  String,  and  use  to  decorate 
table  or  tree,  or  to  festoon  from  the  center  of  the 
ceiling  to  the  corners  and  sides  of  the  room. 

Kindergarten  Lanterns  (Red,  gold,  or  silver  paper, 

scissors,  thread,  paste) 

Take  a  kindergarten  square  of  pretty  paper  or 
make  a  square  of  some  attractive  wrapping  paper. 
Fold  once  into  an  oblong.  Now  cut  a  series  of  parallel 
lines  from  the  fold  toward  the  edge,  stopping  each 
about  Y-2  inch  from  edge.  Open  and  paste  one  end  so 
that  it  overlaps  the  other,  the  cuts  running  vertically. 
This  makes  the  lantern  bulge  out  a  little  at  the  fold, 
giving  a  Japanese  lantern  effect.  Suspend  by  a  thread 
tied  to  the  upper  edge  or  paste  a  narrow  strip  of  paper 
on  for  a  handle.  Use  as  decoration  for  Christmas  tree. 

Paper  Chains  (See  pages  56  and  115) 


140  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Reading 

Read  a  part  or  the  whole  of  Dickens'  "Christmas 
Carol,"  "The  Chimes/'  or  "The  Cricket  on  the 
Hearth ;"  or  "Is  There  a  Santa  Claus,"  by  Jacob  Riis ; 
or  "The  Birds'  Christmas  Carol,"  by  Kate  Douglas 
Wiggin.  Longfellow's  "Arsenal  at  Springfield"  and 
"A  Christmas  Hymn,"  by  A.  Domett,  are  also  appro- 
priate. 


CHAPTER  IX 

THE  KEY  BASKET 

or 

HOUSEHOLD  DUTIES  AND  RESPONSIBILITIES 

Train  the  children  little  by  little  to  bear  certain 
light  responsibilities  in  the  home.  Even  in  a  home 
in  which  all  the  household  tasks  are  done  by  trained 
servants  let  the  girl  and  boy  have  some  small  duty 
to  perform,  if  it  be  nothing  more  than  to  keep  the 
match-safes  filled.  They  will  thus  acquire  an  interest 
in  the  home  which  can  be  aroused  in  no  other  way. 

Indeed,  every  child,  boy  and  girl,  should  be  trained 
to  do  easily  and  well  the  common  household  tasks 
upon  which  depend  so  much  of  the  happiness  and  well- 
being  of  the  home.  Such  knowledge  and  skill  often 
prove  of  use  in  unexpected  emergencies  and  make  for 
general  efficiency.  The  ancient  symbol  of  the  house- 
wife's office  is  her  bunch  of  keys,  hung  at  her  waist 
or  placed  in  the  key-basket,  so  we  have  used  this  latter 
phrase  as  our  chapter  heading. 


HOME   TASKS 

Here  are  a  few  brief  directions  for  the  usual 
home  tasks  in  which  both  boys  and  girls  may  to  some 
extent  be  trained. 

141 


142  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Table  Setting  (Usual  dishes  and  cutlery} 

Different  homes  vary  in  unimportant  particulars 
in  the  placing  of  the  dishes.  The  following  is  a  com- 
mon arrangement  for  the  dinner  table: 

At  each  place  lay  the  fork  vertically  at  the  left- 
hand  side,  the  knife  vertically  at  the  right,  and  the 
soup-spoon  to  the  right  of  the  knife.  This  places  each 
utensil  so  that  it  is  ready  for  the  hand  which  uses  it 
most.  Put  the  teaspoons  to  the  right  of  the  soup- 
spoon, and  the  napkin  to  the  left  of  the  fork.  Place 
the  glass  just  above  the  knife,  the  butterdish  above  the 
fork,  and  the  individual  salt-cellar,  if  used,  between 
the  two. 

Father  and  mother  sit  at  the  ends  of  the  table. 
Put  carving-knife  and  fork  at  father's  place ;  also  the 
soup  ladle,  as  father  serves  the  soup  and  carves. 
Mother  pours  the  coffee  and  tea  and  serves  the  vege- 
tables. Therefore  the  soup  and  dinner  dishes  must 
be  placed  before  the  carver,  and  the  needed  vegetable 
dishes  and  cups  and  saucers  at  the  mother's  place. 
Here,  too,  must  be  placed  the  sugar  bowl  and  cream 
pitcher. 

In  the  United  States  it  is  customary  to  serve 
most  vegetables  upon  individual  saucers.  In  England 
they  are  usually  served  upon  the  plate. 

If  salad  is  to  be  served,  oil  and  vinegar  cruets 
may  be  put  on. 

The  dessert  is  usually  served  by  the  mother,  and 
the  necessary  dishes  must,  therefore,  be  placed  at  her 
end  of  the  table. 

If  possible,  always  have  flowers  or  a  growing 
plant  in  the  center  of  the  table,  but  do  not  have  it  so 
high  that  it  obscures  the  view  of  those  persons  sitting 
on  opposite  sides  of  the  table. 

Upon  special  occasions,  particularly  if  the  guests 


The  Key  Basket  143 

are  many,  it  is  convenient  to  indicate  the  place  of 
each  person  by  a  "place  card"  bearing  his  name  and 
decorated  in  some  appropriate  fashion.  Suggestions 
for  such  place  cards  will  be  found  on  other  pages  of 
this  volume. 

Table-Serving  (Tray) 

Train  both  boys  and  girls  to  wait  on  the  table 
quietly  and  quickly.  Then  they  can  save  mother  many 
weary  steps.  Remove  soup-tureen  first;  then  the  indi- 
vidual dishes.  After  the  meat-course,  remove  first 
the  platter  and  vegetable  dishes ;  then  the  plates,  sau- 
cers, etc.,  from  each  individual  place;  then,  if  there 
is  no  salad  course,  the  bread  and  butter  dishes,  cruets, 
etc.,  from  center  of  table.  Next  the  table  must  be 
crumbed.  Do  this  by  quietly  removing  crumbs  from 
each  place  with  crumb-knife  and  tray  or  by  brushing 
with  folded  napkin.  If  salad  is  served,  crumbing 
takes  place  after  that  course. 

Hold  all  dishes  to  left  of  guest,  so  that  he  may 
easily  help  himself  with  his  right  hand. 

Dish- Washing  (Hot  water  in  quantity,  dishpan,  wire 
tray,  drainer,  washing-soda,  soap,  dish-mop,  wash- 
cloth, towels  in  plenty,  both  coarse  and  fine) 
If  two  people  are  to  work  together,  let  one  collect 
the  dishes  and  dispose  of  the  left-over  food,  while 
the  other  washes  the  kettles  and  saucepans.    Get  these 
heavy  cooking  utensils  out  of  the  way  the  first  thing; 
then  the  drudgery  part  is  over  before  the  workers  are 
tired  out. 

Dishes  in  which  potatoes,  cereals,  or  eggs  have 
been  cooked  should  be  put  to  soak,  not  in  hot,  but  in 
cold  or  tepid  water;  they  are  then  readily  cleaned. 
Fill  with  water  as  soon  as  emptied. 


144  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Keep  a  little  washing-soda  on  hand,  dissolved 
in  water  in  a  canning- jar,  for  cleansing  greasy  dishes. 
Have  hot  water  in  abundance,  and,  putting  a  little 
soda  in  with  it,  scrub  the  kettles  briskly  with  the  wire- 
brush  that  comes  for  the  purpose,  or  with  mop,  dish- 
cloth or  chain  dish-cloth.  Wipe  dry  with  a  heavy 
towel. 

Meanwhile  the  other  worker  is  collecting,  scrap- 
ing and  classifying  the  other  dishes.  Before  beginning 
to  wash,  have  all  the  dishes  assorted  according  to 
kind  and  size  and  placed  convenient  to  hand.  When 
putting  away  remnants  of  food  it  is  well  to  have  for 
the  purpose  a  series  of  pitchers  ranging  from  three 
inches  to  about  nine  in  height.  This  gives  sizes  suited 
to  any  quantity  which  may  be  left  over  of  soups,  milk, 
liquid  vegetables,  etc.  They  take  less  room  than 
bowls,  and  the  graduated  series  ornaments  the  shelf. 

A  wire  strainer  should  be  kept  in  the  sink  to  pre- 
vent the  larger  particles  of  waste,  indissoluble  parings, 
coffee  grains,  etc.,  from  going  down  the  drain.  This 
saves  plumber's  bills. 

When  ready  for  the  washing,  begin  with  the 
glasses  and  wash  quickly  in  hot  water,  either  clear  or 
soapy,  as  preferred.  Have  at  hand  a  second  dish-pan 
in  which  is  placed  a  wire  rack.  Put  the  glasses  in  the 
rack,  rinse  with  hot  water,  and  dry  rapidly  while  still 
wet  and  hot.  It  may  be  necessary  to  keep  them  in  the 
water  a  moment  or  two  to  get  them  really  heated 
through.  In  washing  glass  pitchers  put  a  silver  spoon 
in  them  before  placing  in  the  hot  water.  This  prevents 
breakage.  Treat  canning- jars  in  the  same  way. 

Next  wash  the  silver,  having  the  water  soapy  and 
piping  hot,  in  order  to  get  a  good  polish.  Keep  spoons, 
knives  and  forks  in  separate  groups  and  all  pointing 
in  the  same  direction. 


The  Key  Basket  145 

The  smaller,  less  greasy  dishes  follow  the  silver, 
and  then  the  heavy  china.  Here,  again,  let  dishes  that 
have  held  eggs  or  starchy  foods  soak  awhile  in  cold 
or  tepid  water.  Rinse  greasy  dishes  well. 

Conclude  by  scrubbing  tables  and  sink  with  cloth, 
brush,  soap  and  sapolio  as  needed.  Put  the  scrapings 
in  the  garbage  pail  and  pour  hot  water  and  soda  down 
the  pipe  to  remove  the  last  vestige  of  grease.  Hang 
up  the  shining  dish-pans,  after  washing  out  the  towels 
and  dish-cloth  in  soap  and  water,  if  they  require  it. 

A  can  of  Babbitt's  Potash  of  Lye  may  take  the 
place  of  the  washing-soda. 

Bed-Making  (Two  sheets,  blanket,  comforter,  cover) 

Put  the  lower  sheet  on  with  the  right  side  up. 
Tuck  it  in  neatly  at  the  corners  much  as  one  would 
fold  in  the  corners  when  wrapping  up  a  box  in  paper. 
Place  the  upper  sheet  upon  this  with  the  right  side 
down.  This  brings  the  two  right  sides  together.  Let 
the  broad  hem  in  each  case  be  at  the  head  of  the  bed. 
That  of  the  upper  sheet  should  just  reach  the  head 
of  the  mattress. 

Place  the  blanket  with  its  upper  end  about  six 
inches  from  the  head  of  the  bed.  Then  comes  the 
comforter,  placed  in  the  same  way.  Fold  the  sheet 
down  from  the  top  just  where  the  blanket  ends.  Tuck 
all  in  neatly  at  the  sides  and  the  foot.  Now  put  the 
spread  smoothly  over  all.  It  may  be  tucked  in  or 
may  hang  down  as  desired.  Place  the  pillows  with  the 
closed  ends  of  the  cases  together. 

If  an  extra  coverlet  is  to  be  placed  at  the  foot 
of  the  bed,  fold  it  in  thirds  so  that  the  sleeper  may 
reach  down  and  draw  it  up  over  himself  without  rising 
to  the  floor. 


146  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

To  put  on  a  bolster-case  easily,  turn  it  wrong  side 
out  and  then  roll  it  up  over  the  bolster. 

Train  children  to  air  beds  every  morning  by 
shaking  up  bed-clothing  and  extending  it  over  foot- 
board and  chair. 

Washing  (Toy  tub  or  tin  basin,  toy  washboard,  basin 

for  boiler,  soap,  bit  of  blueing  tied  in  bag,  strong 

cord  for  line) 

Put  dolls'  clothes  or  a  few  dustcloths  or  handker- 
chiefs in  tub  of  warm  water  after  soaping  well.  Let 
soak  awhile,  then  rub  out  on  the  little  washboard  or 
between  the  hands,  put  into  the  boiler  with  cold  water 
and  just  bring  to  a  boil.  Rinse  in  warm  water  or 
wash  vigorously  in  warm  water  if  necessary;  then 
rinse  in  warm  and  then  in  cold  water ;  put  the  blueing 
in  a  basin  of  cold  water  till  the  water  is  slightly 
tinged;  remove  the  blueing  bag  and  rinse  the  clothes 
in  the  water.  (The  blueing  is  to  counteract  the  ten- 
dency of  white  goods  to  grow  yellow  with  time.) 

Hang  up  to  dry  in  the  air  and  sunshine. 

Tell  the  children  that  the  clothes  must  always  be 
sorted,  white  body  clothes  being  in  one  class,  bed- 
linen  in  another,  table  linen  in  another ;  woolens  must 
be  washed  by  themselves  with  care  to  keep  the  water 
of  moderate  temperature  and  the  rinsing  water  of  the 
same  degree  of  heat  as  the  washing  water.  Flannels 
must  be  dried  as  rapidly  as  possible.  Colored  gar- 
ments must  be  washed  by  themselves. 

Ironing    (Two   irons,    holders,   ironing   blanket   and 

sheet,  iron-stand,  cake  of  beesiva.r  or  candle) 

Before    ironing    the    clothes    must    be    sprinkled 

lightly  with  cold  water,  smoothed  out  and  rolled  up 

tightly  for  half  an  hour.     Meanwhile  pin  the  blanket 


The  Key  Basket  147 

to  the  ironing  board  and  cover  smoothly  with  the 
.sheet.  The  iron  must  not  be  so  hot  as  to  scorch 
the  clothes.  Try  it  on  a  piece  of  paper.  If  it  seems 
dirty  or  rough,  rub  it  on  the  beeswax  to  make  it  clean 
and  smooth.  (In  place  of  wax  a  candle  will  serve 
the  purpose  if  wrapped  around  with  a  piece  of  clean 
cotton  cloth.)  If  the  garment  seems  too  wet,  put  a 
piece  of  white  cloth  over  it  and  iron  till  somewhat 
dry.  Then  the  iron  may  be  placed  directly  upon  the 
garment. 

Starch  is  prepared  by  wetting  and  dissolving  it 
in  cold  water  and  then  pouring  upon  this  boiling  water 
and  boiling  until  clear  and  smooth.  The  young  child 
will  not  need  to  starch  anything,  however. 

Sweeping    (Broom,  whisk-broom,  hair-broom,  sheet, 

sweeping-cap) 

Let  the  little  worker  don  sweeping-cap  and  apron, 
and  then  proceed  to  dust  carefully  small  articles  and 
books,  place  them  on  the  bed  and  cover  with  an  old' 
sheet.  Put  furniture  which  is  movable  in  the  hall 
after  dusting.  Open  the  window.  Then  sweep  the 
rugs  on  both  sides  and  place  outside.  Pin  up  the  cur- 
tains. Then  dampen  a  newspaper  and  tear  into  small 
pieces ;  throw  these  on  the  floor  to  absorb  the  dust. 
Wet  tea-leaves  may  be  used  for  the  same  purpose. 

Sweep,  holding  the  broom  rather  closely  to  the 
floor  and  taking  short  strokes,  raising  as  little  dust 
as  possible.  Then  leave  the  room  for  awhile,  for  the 
dust  to  settle. 

Dusting  (Dusters  of  cheesecloth,  clean  pieces  of  old 

silk,  chamois-skin) 

On  returning  to  the  room  after  sweeping,  wipe 
off  the  baseboard,  then  the  furniture,  always  working 


148  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

from  the  top  down.  To  reach  high  corners  where 
cobwebs  may  lurk,  pin  on  the  brush  of  the  broom  a 
cap  of  cheesecloth  and  sweep  along  the  edges  of  the 
ceiling.  For  corners  under  heavy  furniture,  a  small 
whisk  brush  or  soft  hair  brush  may  be  needed. 

Rub  off  mirrors  with  a  damp  cloth,  drying  and 
polishing  with  chamois-skin  or  crumpled  newspaper. 
Highly  polished  furniture  may  be  dusted  with  soft 
silk  or  chamois-skin. 

Even  small  members  of  the  family  may  be  given 
a  share  in  this  work.  Little  boys  and  girls  can  be 
shown  how  to  dust  chairs  and  furniture  within  reach 
of  the  little  arms  and  hands.  It  may  take  more  time 
at  first  on  the  mother's  part  than  if  she  did  the  work 
herself;  but  in  the  end  she  is  more  than  repaid.  The 
little  child  need  not  be  required  to  do  much,  but  let 
that  little  be  done  thoroughly,  if  only  the  legs  and 
rounds  of  one  chair. 


CHAPTER  X 
THE  CHILD'S  LIBRARY 

Every  child  should  be  encouraged  to  possess  his 
own  books  even  in  this  age  of  public  libraries.  Birth- 
days and  Christmas  afford  occasions  when  the  parent 
can  increase  the  little  library,  and  later  the  child  may 
be  trained  how  to  choose  wisely  his  own  purchases. 
When  he  is  limited  in  the  books  he  possesses  public 
libraries  open  up  opportunities  for  a  wide  range  of 
reading. 

We  give  a  brief  but  varied  list  of  books  from 
which  the  parent  may  select  such  as  suit  her  child's 
particular  needs.  The  discriminating  taste  in  reading 
must  be  cultivated  from  the  earliest  years  if  the  child 
is  to  read  with  profit  and  pleasure  in  youth  and  ma- 
turity. 

All  children  should  be  allowed  to  read  a  few  at 
least  of  the  traditional  fairy  tales.  They  teach  many 
important  life  lessons  in  an  impersonal  way ;  they  de- 
velop the  imagination  and  widen  the  sympathies.  The 
successful  business  man,  the  progressive  physician  or 
lawyer,  and  the  truly  successful  minister  is  he  who 
understands  human  nature,  who  can  put  himself  in  the 
other  person's  place ;  and  to  do  this  he  requires  a  culti- 
vated imagination.  The  fairy  tale  also  lifts  the  child 
from  the  restricted  life  of  his  environment  into  the 
region  of  boundless  possibilities.  It  increases  his 
sense  of  power  over  untoward  circumstances.  Ac- 
quaintance with  fairy  lore  also  familiarizes  one  with 

149 


150  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

many  allusions  to  be  met  with  in  reading  all  great 
writers. 

A  love  of  poetry  should  be  the  heritage  of  every 
child,  because  of  the  inspiration  it  gives  amidst  the 
sordid  cares  of  life,  and  because  of  the  innocent  pleas- 
ure and  refreshment  it  affords  in  hours  of  loneliness 
and  weariness.  The  child's  first  book  of  verse  should, 
of  course,  be  Mother  Goose.  After  this  there  are  many 
valuable  compilations  of  good  poetry  that  may  be  used. 

A  varied  library  to  be  found  in  one  large  volume 
is  "The  Children's  Book"  compiled  by  Scudder.  It 
includes  selections  from  Mother  Goose,  from  Grimm's 
fairy  tales,  from  old  English  fairy  tales,  the  Arabian 
Nights,  and  Hans  Andersen.  There  are  also  several 
of  Maria  Edgeworth's  famous  moral  stories,  a  great 
many  of  ^sop's  fables,  many  of  the  old  English 
ballads,  etc.  An  excellent  compilation  of  verse  is 
Roger  Ingpen's  "One  Thousand  Poems  for  Children," 
which  contains  all  the  old  favorites  of  children  as  well 
as  a  large  number  of  the  best-known  poems  by  stand- 
ard authors. 

Standard  books  on  science  and  nature  should  be 
in  the  home,  and  the  child's  library  should  include  a 
few  books  with  stories  from  real  life  leading  up  to 
biography,  history,  and  travel. 

The  little  one's  sense  of  humor  must  be  accorded 
recognition.  Mother  Goose  supplies  such  a  need  in 
part,  and  Lear's  Book  of  Nonsense  may  be  added. 
The  Sunday  funny  sheet  should  be  censored  before 
being  put  into  the  hands  of  the  child.  Expurgate  any- 
thing that  expresses  disrespect  to  old  age ;  that  makes 
light  of  honor  and  integrity ;  or  that  is  coarse  in  draw- 
ing, color,  or  subtle  suggestion.  If  the  child  when 
grown  is  to  appreciate  the  delicate  humor  of  a  Charles 
Lamb,  his  taste  must  not  be  dulled  when  he  is  young. 


The  Child's  Library  151 

It  is  a  pity  for  a  child  to  grow  up  without  know- 
ing and  loving  the  "Pilgrim's  Progress."  To  give  him 
this  pleasure  the  book  should  be  read  to  him  or  put 
into  his  hands  when  about  ten  years  old.  Otherwise 
the  psychologic  moment  has  passed  and  he  may  never 
learn  to  care  for  the  great  English  classic. 

The  great  mediaeval  legends  should  also  be  known 
to  the  child.  They  are  interwoven  with  much  of 
history  and  literature  and  give  a  glimpse  into  a  rapidly 
receding  past. 

We  include  in  our  list  a  charming  wee  volume, 
"The  Young  Folks'  Book  of  Etiquette,"  by  C.  S.  Grif- 
fen,  which  the  mother,  wearied  of  repeating  from  day 
to  day  the  same  admonitions  as  to  manners  and  morals, 
will  find  a  great  assistance  in  seconding  her  efforts. 
The  child  will  enjoy  both  the  text  and  the  pictures. 

For  the  child's  Bible  reading  we  recommend 
Moulton's  edition  of  the  Old  and  New  Testaments. 
The  language  is  identical  with  that  of  the  familiar 
old  volume,  but  the  text  is  condensed  so  that  each  story 
is  given  in  the  form  of  a  continuous  narrative,  and  ob- 
jectionable passages  are  omitted.  It  may  thus  safely 
be  put  into  the  hands  of  very  young  children,  who  en- 
joy the  simple,  dignified  style. 

Music  also  must  form  a  part  of  the  child's  library. 
The  list  appended  covers  a  variety  of  needs. 


FAIRY  TALES,  MYTHS,  AND   LEGENDS 

Adventures  of  Pinocchio,  trans-  Among  the  Night  People,  Clara 

lated  from  Cullodi  by  Cramp  (an  D.  Pierson.  (Exceptionally  good.) 

Italian  classic  loved  by  children).  Arabian  Nights  Entertainments. 

/Esop's  Fables.  Bimbi,   Ouida.      (Collection  of 

Alice  in  Wonderland,  Lewis  '*S5*  ofSi*  and  Friendly 

Larro11'  Beasts,  Abbie  Farwell  Brown. 

Among  the  Farmyard  People,  Bow-wow  and  Mew-mew,  Georg- 

Clara  D.  Pierson.  iana  M.  Craik. 


52  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

FAIRY  TALES,  ETC.— Continued 


Boys'  Odyssey,  W.  C.  Perry. 

Curious  Book  of  Birds,  Abbie 
Farwell  Brown. 

Fairy  Tales,  Hans  Christian 
Andersen. 

Fifty  Famous  Stories  Retold, 
Baldwin. 

Folk  Tales  from  the  Russian, 
Blumenthal. 

Gods  and  Heroes,  Francillon. 
(Greek  legends.) 

Household  Stories,  Anna  C. 
Klingensmith. 

Heroes  Every  Child  Should 
Know,  Hamilton  Wright  Mabie. 

In  the  Days  of  Giants,  Abbie 
Farwell  Brown.  (Norse  legends.) 

Japanese  Fairy  Tales,  trans- 
lated by  Williston. 

Jungle  Book,  Kipling. 

King  Arthur  and  His  Court, 
Frances  Nimmo  Greene. 

Knights  of  the  Silver  Shield, 
R.  M.  Alden.  (Includes  "Why 
the  Chimes  Rang.") 

Little  Black  Sambo.  (Beloved 
by  young  children.) 

Mother  Goose  (Altemus  edi- 
tion), including  a  few  fairy  tales. 

Nights  with  Uncle  Remus,  Joel 
Chandler  Harris. 

Norse  Gods  and  Heroes,  A. 
Klingensmith. 


Norse  Tales,  Hamilton  W. 
Mabie. 

Peterkin  Papers,  Hale.  (Af- 
ford pure,  wholesome  humor.) 

Peter  Rabbit,  The  Tale  of, 
Beatrix  Potter. 

Saints  of  Italy  Legends,  Ella 
Noyes. 

Story  of  Siegfried,  Baldwin. 

The  Boys'  King  Arthur,  edited 
by  Lanier. 

The  Red  Book  of  Romance, 
edited  by  Lang. 

The  Red  Fairy  Book  and 
others  of  same  series,  edited  by 
Lang. 

Tanglewood  Tales,  Hawthorne 
(Greek  Legends). 

The  Oak  Tree  Fairy  Book,  ed- 
ited by  Clifton  Johnson. 

The  Pilgrim's  Progress,  Bun- 
yan. 

The  Stars  in  Song  and  Le- 
gend, Jermain  G.  Porter. 

The  Wonder  Book,  Haw- 
thorne. 

Wagner  Story  Book,  F_rost. 

Wandering  Heroes,  Lillian  T. 
Price. 

Water  Babies,  Charles  Kings- 
ley. 

Wizard  of  Oz,  Baum. 


HISTORY  AND  BIOGRAPHY 


Childhood  of  Ji-Shib  the  Ojib- 
wa,  A.  E.  Jenks. 

Children  of  the  Cold,  Fred- 
erick Schwatka.  (Life  among 
Esquimaux  children.) 

Cuore,  de  Amicis,  translated 
by  Mrs.  Lucas.  (Experiences  of 
a  school  boy  in  Italy.) 

Each  and  All,  Jane  Andrews. 

Five  Minute  Stories,  Laura  E. 
Richards. 

History  of  the  Ancient  Greeks, 
C.  D.  Staw. 


Lolami,  the  Little  Cliff-Dwel- 
ler,  Clara  K.  Bayliss. 

Ten  Boys  of  Long  Ago,  An- 
drews. 

The  Chinese  Boy  and  Girl, 
Bishop  Headland. 

The  Snow  Baby,  Mrs.  Peary. 

Seven  Little  Sisters,  Jane  An- 
drews. 

Story  of  Joan  of  Arc  for  Boys 
and  Girls. 

Story  of  My  Life,  Helen  Kel- 
ler. 

Story  of  Troy,  M.  Clarke. 


The  Child's  Library 


'53 


NATURE 


A  Year  in  the  Fields,  Bur- 
roughs. 

Everyday  Birds,  Bradford 
Torrey. 

First  Book  of  Forestry,  Fili- 
bert  Roth. 

Friends  in  Feathers  and  Fur, 
Johonnot. 

Grasshopper  Land,  Margaret 
Morley. 

How  to  Attract  Birds,  Neltje 
Blanchan. 

Lady  Hollyhock  and  Her 
Friends,  Margaret  C.  Walker. 
(Tells  how  to  make  dolls  out  ot 
flowers.) 

Plant  Relations,  Coulter. 


Pussy  Meow,  S.  Louis*  Patte- 

The  Bee  People,  Margaret 
Morley. 

The  Hall  of  Shells. 

The  Stars  in  Song  and  Le- 
gend, J.  G.  Porter. 

The  Training  of  Wild  Ani- 
mals, Frank  C.  Bostock. 

Trees  in  Prose  and  Poetry, 
Stone  and  Fickett. 

Ways  of  the  Woodtolk,  Wil- 
liam J.  Long. 

Wilderness   Ways,   William  J. 

Wild  Animals  I  Have  Known, 
Seton  Thompson. 


POETRY 


Book  of  Nursery  Rhymes,  New 
Collection  of  Old  Mother  Goose, 
Charles  Welsh. 

Children's  Book,  The,  compila- 
tion by  Scudder.  (Prose  and 
verse.) 

Child's  Garden  of  Verses,  Rob- 
ert L.  Stevenson. 

The  Chinese  Mother  Goose, 
Bishop  Headland.  (Charmingly 
illustrated  with  photographic 
pictures  of  Chinese  children  with 
their  parents.) 

Golden  Numbers,  Kate  Doug- 
las Wiggin.  (Choice  collection  of 
miscellaneous  poetry;  beautifully 
bound.) 


Little  Rhymes  for  Little  Read- 
ers, Wilhelmina  Seegmiller. 

Lyrica  Heroica,  edited  by  W. 
E.  Henley. 

One  Thousand  Poems  for  Chil- 
dren, Roger  Ingpen.  (A  very 
full  collection.) 

The  Listening  Child,  L.  W. 
Thacher.  (Compilation  of  short 
poems  suitable  for  children  over 
six.) 

The  Posy  Ring,  Kate  Douglas 
Wiggin.  (Choice  collection  for 
young  children.) 

(o7"" 


The    Robin's    Christr 
)ld  English  ballad.) 


PICTURE  BOOKS 


An  Apple  Pie,  Kate  Green- 
away. 

At  Great  Aunt  Martha's  (Pic- 
tures), Kathleen  Ainslie.  (Il- 
lustrations of  wooden  dolls.) 

Book  of  Nonsense,  Edward 
Lear.  (Highly  recommended  by 
Ruskin.) 


Dean's  Rag  Books.  (For  very 
young  children;  will  wash  and 
iron.) 

Jingleman  Jack  (Pictures  and 
verses  about  the  trades),  O'Dea 
and  Kennedy. 

Four  and  Twenty  Toilers, 
Lucas.  (Hard  to  procure.) 


154  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 


MUSIC 


Holiday   Songs,   Emilie   Pouls- 


Children's Messiah,  Mari  Ruef 
Hofer. 

Children's  Singing  Games,  Old 
and  New,  Mari  Ruef  Hofer. 

Christmas-Time  Songs  and 
Carols,  Mrs.  Crosby  Adams. 

Finger  Plays,  Emilie  Poulsson. 

li 
son. 

Merry  Songs  and  Games  for 
the  Use  of  the  Kindergarten, 
Clara  B.  Hubbard. 

Music  for  the  Child  World, 
Mari  Ruef  Hofer.  Two  vols. 
(Music  every  child  should 
know.) 

Nature  Songs  for  Children, 
Fanny  Snow  Knowlton. 

Primary  and  Junior  Soags  for 
the  Sunday-school,  Mari  Ruef 
Hofer. 


Small  Songs  for  Small  Singers, 
illustrated,  W.  H.  Neidlinger. 

Song  Stories  for  the  Kinder- 
garten, Mildred  and  Patty  Hill. 

Songs  and  Games  for  Little 
Ones,  Walker  and  Jenks. 

Songs  and  Games  of  the 
Mother-Play  Book,  Froebel. 

Songs  Every  Child  Should 
Know,  Dolores  Bacon. 

Songs  for  Little  Children, 
Eleanor  Smith.  Two  vols. 

Songs  of  Childhood,  Field  dc 
Koyen  Song  Book. 

Songs  of  the  Open,  Seeboeck. 

Songs  of  the  Child  World, 
Jessie  L.  Gay  nor. 

St.  Nicholas  Songs,  the  Words 
from  St.  Nicholas  Magazine. 


SUNDAY-SCHOOL  HELPS 


A  Year  of  Sunday-school 
Work,  Florence  U.  Palmer. 

Beginnings,  A.  W.  Gould. 
Pamphlet.  Tells  of  the  begin- 
nings of  world,  man,  sin,  lan- 
guage, death,  law,  etc.,  accord- 
ing to  the  Bible,  according  to 
Science,  and  according  to  old 
myths. 

Bible  for  Young  People, 
Century  Co. 

Kindergarten         Sunday-school 


Stories,  Laura  A.  Cragin. 
(New  Testament.) 

Old  and  New  Testament  for 
Children,  edited  by  Richard  G. 
Moulton. 

Old  Testament  Bible  Stories, 
Walter  L.  Sheldon. 

Stories  from  the  Lips  of  the 
Teacher,  O.  B.  Frothingham. 

Stories  of  the  Patriarchs, 
O.  B.  Frothingham. 

Wonder  Stories  from  the  Gos- 
pels, Katherinc  Beebe. 


CHAPTER  XI 

KINDERGARTEN  MATERIALS 

The  Kindergarten  Gifts 

Friedrich  Froebel,  after  observing  and  studying 
thoughtfully  the  play  and  playthings  of  little  children, 
selected  from  among  these,  and  arranged  in  logical 
order,  a  certain  series  which  should  help  develop  the 
little  one  in  mind,  body,  and  spirit  through  childlike 
play.  This  series  of  related  playthings  is  known  as  the 
kindergarten  ''gifts." 

All  children  of  all  races  play  ball,  and  the  first 
kindergarten  gift  to  be  given,  even  to  a  very  little 
child,  consists  of  six  soft  worsted  balls  in  the  colors 
red,  orange,  yellow,  green,  blue,  and  violet. 

The  second  gift  is  an  oblong  box  containing  a 
wooden  ball  or  "sphere,"  a  cube,  and  a  cylinder,  with 
several  slender  axles  and  beams  to  assist  in  the  little 
plays. 

The  third  gift  is  a  box  containing  a  two-inch 
cube  divided  horizontally  and  vertically  into  eight 
one-inch  cubes. 

The  fourth  gift  is  a  similar  cube  divided  hori- 
zontally into  eight  oblong  blocks. 

The  fifth  gift  is  evolved  from  the  preceding  ones 
and  is  a  five-inch  cube  divided  into  inch  cubes,  half 
cubes,  and  quarter  cubes. 

The  sixth  gift  is  a  cube  of  the  same  size  divided 
so  that  it  contains  cubes,  oblongs,  and  plinths. 

The  third,  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  gifts  are  derived 
from  the  geometrical  solids. 
155 


156  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

The  seventh  gift  is  derived  from  the  geomet- 
rical surfaces,  and  consists  of  wooden  tablets  in 
shapes  of  circles,  squares,  triangles,  etc. 

The  eighth  gift  represents  the  geometrical  line  and 
is  made  up  of  wooden  sticks  in  lengths  of  one,  two, 
three,  four,  five,  and  six  inches.  They  may  be  had  in 
two  thicknesses  and  either  colored  or  uncolored. 

The  ninth  gift,  derived  from  the  edge  of  the  circle, 
consists  of  metal  rings,  half  rings,  and  quarter  rings, 
in  several  sizes. 

The  tenth  gift,  derived  from  the  geometric  point, 
is  the  lentil. 

Kindergartners  differ  as  to  the  amount  of  em- 
phasis to  be  placed  upon  the  geometric  side  of  the 
"gifts,"  and  as  to  whether  or  not  they  should  always 
be  presented  in  a  certain  logical  order.  To  appreciate 
their  full  value  the  mother  must  read  her  Froebel  or 
take  a  kindergarten  course.  We  give  below  some 
simple  methods  of  using  them,  from  which  the  child 
will  derive  both  pleasure  and  benefit.  What  follows 
should  be  entirely  clear,  especially  if  the  mother  has 
the  "gifts"  before  her  as  she  reads. 

First  Gift  Balls  (Rubber  ball  il/2  inches  in  diameter, 
zvool  in  six  primary  colors,  crochet-hook} 
These  balls  can  be  made  by  taking  a  rubber  ball 
and  crocheting  around  it  a  case  of  worsted ;  or  a  case 
can  be  crocheted  and  then  stuffed  with  loose  wool  or 
cotton.  In  the  latter  case  to  insure  a  good  shape  it  is 
well  to  crochet  over  a  ball  till  nearly  finished ;  then 
take  the  rubber  ball  out  and  fill  with  the  cotton  or 
wool  and  then  complete  the  ball.  Then  crochet  a 
string  about  eight  inches  long  and  attach  to  the  ball, 
for  suspending  it.  The  ball  can  then  be  swung,  raised, 
lowered,  made  to  hop  like  a  bird,  swing  like  a  pendu- 


Kindergarten  Materials  157 

lum,  revolve  rapidly  like  a  wheel.  The  child  may 
play  that  it  is  a  bucket  being  raised  or  lowered.  See 
how  steadily  he  can  raise  it. 

The  balls  lend  themselves  to  many  color  games. 

1.  Place  them  in  a  row,  let  one  child  blind  his 
eyes,  another  one  removes  one  of  the  balls  and  the 
first  one,  opening  his  eyes,  tries  to  think  which  one  is 
missing. 

2.  Let  children  observe  the  colors  through  a  glass 
prism  and  try  to  arrange  balls  in  similar  order.    Ask 
child  if  he  can  tell  which  colors  are  uppermost  in  the 
rainbow,  the  cold  or  the  warm  ones. 

3.  If  the  mother  is  sewing  on  a  colored  dress,  let 
the  child  try  to  pick  out  the  ball  resembling  it  in  color. 

4.  Play  hiding  the  ball,  as  in  hide  the  thimble. 

5.  Play  store,  letting  him  tell  you  which  ball  will 
best  represent  a  lemon,  an  orange,  a  red  apple,  etc. 

Second  Gift  Plays 

Throughout  his  life,  Froebel  felt  with  keen  pain 
all  that  was  discordant  or  inharmonious  in  human  so- 
ciety. Beneath  all  differences  and  misunderstandings 
lay,  he  believed,  the  possibility  of  adjustment,  or  recon- 
ciliation. Relations  most  strained  might  be  brought 
into  harmonious  union.  This  great  idea  is  typified  by 
the  second  gift.  The  hard  wooden  sphere  is  round, 
curved  from  all  points  of  view,  with  no  angles  or 
edges,  and  is  easily  moved.  The  cube  is  a  complete 
contrast  to  the  sphere,  inasmuch  as  it  stands  firmly, 
has  Hat  faces,  angles,  and  edges.  The  cylinder  com- 
bines the  characteristics  and  possibilities  of  the  other 
two.  It  has  fiat  faces  as  well  as  a  curved  one,  and 
can  both  stand  and  roll.  It  forms  a  bond  of  connec- 
tion between  the  other  two  which  at  first  sight  seem 
irreconcilable. 


158  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Three  of  these  forms  have  small  staples  inserted 
in  side,  edge,  and  angle  so  that  they  may  be  suspended, 
swung,  and  revolved.  There  are  also  perforations 
through  each  one  admitting  the  insertion  of  the  axles, 
when  needed  for  certain  plays. 

If  an  axle  be  put  through  cube  or  cylinder  and  it 
be  revolved  rapidly,  you  can  see,  in  the  swift  moving 
figure,  the  spirit,  as  it  were,  of  the  other  forms — an 
experiment  fascinating  to  young  and  old. 

A  little  imagination  will  turn  the  box  in  which 
these  blocks  come,  into  a  boat,  car,  engine,  etc.,  pins, 
matches,  tacks,  wire,  etc.,  being  called  in  as  extras. 

The  little  wooden  beam  may  be  placed  across,  held 
up  by  the  axles  and  upon  this  the  blocks  may  be  sus- 
pended as  objects  for  sale  in  a  store. 

The  box  with  its  cover  may  be  used  to  illustrate 
the  three  primary  mechanical  principles,  the  pulley,  or 
wheel,  the  inclined  plane,  and  the  lever.  The  pulley 
is  made  by  placing  the  cylinder  on  an  axle,  tying  a 
little  weight  to  one  end  of  a  cord  and  drawing  it  up 
over  the  cylinder.  Let  the  child  play  the  weight  is  a 
bucket  of  water  being  drawn  up  from  a  well. 

Play  loading  a  boat  and  use  the  cover  for  a  plank, 
inclined  from  the  deck  to  the  ground,  up  which  to  roll 
a  barrel  (the  cylinder). 

Play  that  the  cube  is  a  heavy  piano  box  and  show 
how  to  raise  it  by  using  a  stick  as  a  lever. 

The  students  of  a  kindergarten  training  school 
made  fine  derrick  cranes  with  this  box  of  blocks,  and 
no  two  were  exactly  alike. 


Games  with  Second  Gift  Ball 

I.  Let   children   sit  crossed-legged   on   the   floor 
in  a  circle  and  let  one  child  roll  the  ball  across  to  an- 


Kindergarten  Materials  159 

other  child.     He  in  turn  rolls  it  straight  over  to  some 
other  child  and  so  on. 

2.  Let  one  child  sit  in  the  center  of  a  circle  and 
roll  the  ball  to  each  child  in  turn,  who  rolls  it  back 
to  him. 

3.  Let  several  children  stand  in  the  center  of  a 
ring  and  try  to  catch  the  ball  as  it  rolls  swiftly  by. 

4.  Let  children  stand  in  center  and  try  to  avoid 
being  touched  by  the  ball  as  it  rolls  along. 

5.  Draw  a  circle  on  the  floor  and  let  the  children 
try  in  turn  to  so  roll  the  ball  that  it  will  stop  inside  of 
the  ring. 

6.  Place  the  cube  in  the  center  of  the  circle.    Put 
the  cylinder  on  top  of  the  cube  and  balance  the  sphere 
carefully  upon  the  cylinder.    Then  let  the  children  try 
to  hit  this  target  with  another  ball. 

Many  are  the  lessons  in  self-control,  fair  play, 
patience  and  kindness  which  the  children  practice  in 
playing  these  simple  games,  in  addition  to  the  physical 
exercise  and  training  in  alertness,  in  seeing  correctly 
and  in  acting  quickly. 

Second  Gift  Beads 

Mrs.  Hailmann,  a  kindergarten  training  teacher, 
some  years  ago  added  to  the  "gifts"  the  so-called  "sec- 
ond gift  beads,"  much  loved  by  wee  children. 

These  are  perforated  wooden  beads  in  shape  of 
the  sphere,  cube  and  cylinder.  They  come  in  two  size?; 
and  may  be  had  in  colors  or  uncolored.  A  shoe  lace 
comes  with  them  for  stringing. 

In  delightful  plays  with  these  beads  the  child 
learns  to  distinguish  form  and  color,  and  has  practice 
in  simple  designing. 

At  first  let  him  have  a  number  of  different  kinds 


160  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

and  let  him  thread  them  as  he  pleases.  Observe  him 
and  see  if,  of  his  own  initiative,  he  will  distinguish 
either  form  or  color.  After  a  while  he  will  probably, 
without  suggestion,  begin  to  string  them  in  some  sort 
of  order — one  sphere,  one  cube,  one  sphere,  one  cube, 
etc.  Two  spheres,  two  cubes,  two  cylinders,  etc. 

When  he  begins  to  see  differences,  give  him  two 
forms  only  and  let  him  arrange.  Later  give  him  others. 
Too  many  at  first  will  be  confusing. 

Besides  the  stringing,  these  beads  may  be  used 
in  other  ways.  Make  a  fence  by  putting  two  cubes 
and  a  sphere,  one  on  top  of  the  other  for  a  post,  and 
then  join  these  to  similar  posts  by  running  toothpicks 
or  burnt  matches  through  the  perforations. 

Place  cubes  and  cylinders,  one  on  top  of  another, 
and  use  as  tree  box  with  tiny  twig  or  elderberry  branch 
for  tree.  If  making  a  toy  village  of  blocks  or  card- 
board, these  little  beads  will  make  good  lampposts. 

The  Pegboard 

The  pegboard,  an  additional  gift  devised  by  Mrs. 
Alice  H.  Putnam,  can  also  be  had  in  two  sizes,  the 
large  one  to  be  preferred.  The  board  is  perforated 
with  holes  at  regular  intervals  and  is  accompanied 
with  colored  pegs,  which  the  child  loves  to  insert  in 
the  openings. 

He  may  arrange  them  in  ranks  for  soldiers,  ac- 
cording to  color,  two  and  two,  or  four  and  four, 
learning  thus  to  count. 

A  flower-bed  with  red  flowers  in  one  corner  and 
green  bushes  in  another  may  be  made. 

He  may  play  that  the  pegs  are  kindergarten  chil- 
dren playing  follow  the  leader,  some  with  red  dresses, 
some  with  blue  waists,  etc. 

A  birthday  cake  with  candles  may  be  represented, 


Kindergarten  Materials  161 

or  a  line  of  telegraph  poles,  if  father  has  gone  on  a 
journey,  and  over  the  imaginary  wires  a  message  may 
be  sent. 

The  pegboard  is  also  loved  by  very  young  chil- 
dren. 

Plays  with  the  Other  Gifts 

The  third  gift  cubes  may  be  built  by  the  little 
child  into  houses,  furniture,  wagons,  etc.  It  is  very 
simple,  and  yet  when  handling  it  the  child  learns 
something  of  form  and  number  and  gains  skill  with 
his  tiny  hands. 

The  fourth  gift  expresses  "proportion."  Each 
block  is  twice  the-  length  of  those  in  the  preceding  gift 
and  half  as  high.  He  can  build  with  it  objects  impos- 
sible with  the  first  divided  cube.  The  two  may  often 
be  used  in  conjunction. 

The  fifth  gift  requires  a  decided  increase  in  the 
child's  powers  of  coordination.  He  can  make  with  it 
a  very  great  variety  of  objects.  Only  a  kindergartner 
can  appreciate  its  many  possibilities. 

The  sixth  gift  lends  itself  peculiarly  to  buildings 
of  a  certain  type.  It  expresses  less  strength  and  more 
grace  than  the  preceding  ones. 

In  playing  with  these  "gifts"  under  direction  of 
a  teacher,  the  child,  if  making  the  grocery  store,  pro- 
ceeds to  make  the  counter,  the  scales,  the  money  desk, 
etc.,  in  succession,  and  is  not  allowed  to  take  the  first 
structure  apart  in  disorderly  fashion  and  then  make 
the  next  one,  but  is  supposed  to  build  the  counter,  or 
other  article,  by  gradually  transforming  the  thing  al- 
ready made,  removing  the  blocks  in  ones,  or  twos,  or 
threes  in  an  orderly  way.  Each  block  is  supposed  to 
have  some  relation  to  the  whole.  For  instance  if  a 
shoe  store  has  been  made  and  one  unused  block  re- 


1 62  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

mains,  it  may  represent  the  footstool  used  in  such  a 
store. 

Froebel  thought  in  this  way  through  simple  play 
to  help  the  child  little  by  little  to  feel  the  relatedness 
of  all  life. 

Seventh  Gift  Plays 

With  the  seventh  gift  tablets  the  child  makes 
designs  or  "beauty  forms,"  becoming  familiar  with 
certain  geometrical  forms  and  exercising  his  powers 
of  invention  in  pleasing  design. 

In  using  the  tablets,  which  are  in  both  light  and 
dark  stains,  do  not  give  too  many  at  first.  Give  him 
for  instance  one  circle,  representing  a  picture  of  a 
ball,  and  let  him  lay  a  row  of  such  for  a  frieze  design 
for  a  gymnasium. 

Give  a  circle  and  four  squares,  and  let  him  place 
one  above,  one  below,  one  to  the  right  and  one  to  the 
left,  touching  the  circle.  This  will  suggest  a  unit  for 
a  tile  for  a  playroom  fireplace. 

Tell  him  to  change  the  top  square  so  that  its 
angle  touches  the  circle ;  then  change  the  lower  one 
in  the  same  way ;  then  the  right,  then  the  left.  This 
transformation  gives  an  entirely  new  design. 

The  other  tablets  may  be  employed  in  the  same 
way,  the  different  kinds  of  triangles  offering  oppor- 
tunity for  much  variety. 

Eighth  Gift  Plays 

The  sticks  may  be  used  in  representing  designs 
in  which  the  straight  line  prevails.  The  lines  may  be 
placed  in  vertical  or  horizontal  position.  Sticks  may 
be  arranged  as  soldiers,  standing  two  and  two  in 
straight  vertical  lines ;  or  as  fences  in  horizontal  posi- 
tion. 


Kindergarten  Materials  163 

They  may  be  classified  as  to  length.  Let  the 
child  sort  them  as  wood  for  the  woodpile,  putting  to- 
gether those  of  same  length.  Or  play  he  is  in  the 
store  to  buy  a  cane  and  sees  those  of  different  lengths, 
some  for  men,  some  for  children. 

For  designing  give  the  child  four  sticks  of  one 
length  and  let  him  make  a  square.  Give  him  four  of 
another  length  and  let  him  make  a  larger  square. 
Then  with  these  eight  sticks  let  him  make  two  ob- 
longs of  the  same  size.  Give  him  these  exercises  as 
puzzles,  but  do  not  let  him  play  with  the  sticks  until 
he  gets  nervous  in  trying  to  keep  them  in  position. 

Play  With  Lentils 

These  are  necessarily  few  and  simple.  Let  the 
child  make  circles,  squares,  etc.,  by  putting  the  lentils 
in  rows.  He  can  also  represent  the  mass  of  a  tree's 
foliage  by  placing  a  number  of  the  lentils  in  a  mass. 


CHAPTER  XII 

KINDERGARTEN   MATERIALS 

The  Kindergarten  Occupations 

The  kindergarten  gifts  proceed,  as  will  have  been 
observed,  from  the  solid  through  other  forms  to  the 
point.  The  objects  made  with  these  are  but  temporary, 
and  the  same  material  may  be  used  again  and  again. 

Parallel  with  these  Froebel  devised  what  he  calls 
the  "occupations,"  which  put  into  permanent  shape 
the  ideas  expressed  by  the  gifts. 

Among  the  occupations  (we  will  not  name  all) 
are :  Peaswork,  pricking,  sewing,  weaving,  parquetry, 
pasting,  cardboard  modeling,  sand  and  clay  modeling. 

These  are  arranged  in  reverse  order  to  the  gifts ; 
that  is,  they  proceed  from  the  point  to  the  solid. 

Peaswork  (Good  well-dried  peas,  wooden  toothpicks 

or  hair-wire} 

Soak  the  peas  for  10  or  12  hours  till  soft.  Then 
make  a  cane  of  one  pea  and  one  stick. 

Two  peas  and  one  stick  will  make  a  dumb-bell. 

Three  of  each  will  make  a  triangle. 

Make  a  square  in  the  same  way,  and  then  by 
adding  to  this  other  peas  and  sticks  a  skeleton  chair 
can  be  made.  All  kinds  of  furniture  and  geometrical 
forms  may  be  thus  manufactured.  The  wire  or  tooth- 
pick must  be  inserted  in  the  cheek  of  the  pea.  Watch 
the  child  carefully  to  see  that  he  does  not  get  nervous 
over  the  work.  Assuming  that  the  peas  are  in  good 
164 


The  Kindergarten  Occupations       165 

condition,  there  should  be  little  trouble  if  the  forms 
made  are  simple. 

Pricking    (Thin  white  cardboard,  long  pin,  several 

folds  of  cloth  or  a  piece  of  felt) 

Froebel  recognized  the  appeal  this  pastime  makes 
to  the  mystery-loving  child.  As  sometimes  used  it 
may  be  injurious  to  nerves  or  eyesight ;  but  used  judi- 
ciously the  child  of  five  or  six  will  find  it  a  source  of 
harmless  entertainment. 

Let  mother  or  older  brother  draw  on  cardboard 
a  simple  strong  outline.  Provide  a  strong  steel  pin 
(hat-pin  or  mourning-pin  will  do)  and  a  piece  of 
folded  cloth  for  a  cushion.  Follow  the  outline  by 
pricking  in  it  a  succession  of  holes.  The  rough  side 
is  the  right  side  of  the  decorated  card.  The  card  may 
be  hung  up  as  a  transparency,  or  may  be  made  up  into 
blotter  or  calendar;  or,  if  the  outline  be  that  of  a 
vegetable  or  a  fruit,  it  will  make  up  into  a  Thanks- 
giving place  card. 

Very  beautiful  effects  are  produced  by  pricking 
the  surface  as  well  as  the  outline,  a  form  of  embossing, 
but  this  is  a  great  strain  on  the  nerves.  Let  the  child 
work  for  only  a  few  moments  at  a  time,  and  be  sure 
that  the  light  is  good  and  the  drawing  is  distinct. 

Sewing  (Cardboard,  worsted,  silk  or  chenille,  needle, 

punch) 

It  is  a  disputed  question  now  whether  or  not  the 
cardboard  sewing  of  the  kindergarten,  once  consid- 
ered so  essential,  should  be  used  at  all.  Some  condemn 
it  entirely ;  others  use  it  sparingly.  Many  replace  it 
with  sewing  on  cloth  and  other  materials  soft  and 
flexible,  which  lend  themselves  to  the  kind  of  stitch- 
ing required  later  in  everyday  sewing.  We  cannot 


166  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

now  enter  into  the  discussion,  but  common-sense  rules 
here  as  elsewhere. 

Cards  with  designs  already  drawn  and  perforated 
may  be  bought,  but  the  mother  need  not  feel  that  she 
must  depend  upon  these.  Old  visiting  and  invitation 
cards  may  be  used  for  the  purpose.  We  give  a  few 
examples  of  objects  pretty  and  useful  which  may  be 
made  of  this  material.  These  will  suggest  others  to 
the  active-minded  child.  Get  punch  at  kindergarten 
supply  store;  from  50  cents  up. 

1.  Gift  Card.     Cut  a  square  of  cardboard  5x5 
inches.     With    a    needleful    of    red    worsted    let    the 
child   sew   upon   this   card   three   straight   candles   in 
stitches  one  inch  long.     You  may  first  punch  in  the 
bottom  of  the  card  three  holes  as  guides.     Put  them 
in  a  row  equidistant  from  each  other.     Make  parallel 
to  these  a  row  of  three  dots  in- pencil.     The  child  will 
push  the  needle  through  one  hole  from  bcloii.'  and  put 
it  through  the  dot  above,  making  his  own  hole.     So 
proceed  till  finished.,    A   flame  may  be   drawn   with 
yellow  chalk  at  the  upper  end  of  each  candle,  to  make 
it  more  realistic.     This  card  may  be  used  to  stand  a 
candlestick  upon,  or  to  send  as  a  birthday  card. 

A  similar  card  with  the  red  stitches  lying  hori- 
zontally will  picture  firecrackers  ready  to  be  set  off. 
Use  as  a  mat  for  a  match  safe. 

2.  Cover    for    Medicine    Glass.      Draw    a    circle 
five    inches     in     diameter.     Cut    this     out.     Parallel 
to  the  edge  draw  a  circle  four  inches  in  diameter. 
Make  dots  about  l/>  inch  apart  along  this  second  cir- 
cle.    Punch  holes  through  these  dots.     With  worsted, 
ravelings  or  chenille  let  the  child  sew  once  around  this 
circle.     Then  go  around  the  other  way  to  fill  up  all 
the  gaps  left  the  first  time.     Use  as  cover  for  glass 
of  medicine.     Line  the  bottom  with  clean,  white  paper. 


The  Kindergarten  Occupations        167 

Vary  by  overcasting,  or  from  a  central  hole  take 
long  radiating  stitches  to  the  holes  in  the  circumfer- 
ence like  the  spokes  of  a  wheel. 

3.  Toy  Umbrella.     The  above  circle  with  spokes 
may    be    made    into    a    toy    umbrella    if    a    slender 
stick  be  run  through  for  a  handle.     Stick  a  pin  about 
an  inch  from  the  top  to  keep  the  umbrella  part  from 
slipping  down. 

4.  Bookmark.     Cut  an  oblong  card  2x6  inches. 
Draw    upon    this    a    row    of    parallel    oblique    lines 
about  one  inch  apart  and  one  inch  long.     Punch  holes 
through  the  ends  of  the  lines  at  the  bottom,  sew  one 
slanting  line  to  show  the  child,  and  let  him  finish  the 
row.    A  similar  oblong  will  make  a  napkin  ring  if  the 
ends  be  brought  together  and  tied  with  the  ends  of  the 
worsted. 

Squares,  oblongs,  crosses,  etc.,  may  thus  be 
punched  and  sewed. 

If  no  punch  is  obtainable,  make  the  holes  with  a 
coarse  needle  or  strong  pin. 

Paper  Tearing  (See  page  54) 

Paper  Cutting 

This  is  another  Froebelian  occupation.  Some  sug- 
gestions have_been  given  elsewhere.  (See  page  54.) 
We  will  spealc  here  of  a  more  definite  series  of  pro- 
gressive steps. 

Take  a  square  of  white  paper.  Fold  once  to 
make  an  oblong.  Keep  folded  and  fold  once  more, 
which  gives  a  small  square.  From  the  corners  of  this 
square  cut  pieces,  large  or  small.  Keep  these.  Open 
the  paper  and  lay  it  down.  Then  arrange  around  it 
the  cut-off  corners  to  make  a  design.  They  may  be 


1 68  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

arranged  in  a  variety  of  ways.  The  pieces  cut  off  the 
corners  may  be  of  various  shapes. 

Vary  another  square  by  cutting  into  it,  after  it 
has  been  folded,  triangles  or  other  figures.  Open  and 
arrange  around  it  these  cut-off  pieces.  When  a  satis- 
factory design  has  thus  been  made,  it  may  be  pasted 
on  a  pleasing  background  of  paper. 

In  kindergarten  training,  checked  paper  is  pro- 
vided and  the  cuttings  are  made  from  lines  drawn 
upon  this  according  to  a  progressive  system. 

Parquetry  (Colored  papers,  paste,  kindergarten  slat  or 

match  for  paste-stick) 

This  occupation  has  its  parallel  in  the  tablets. 
The  designs  made  temporarily  with  the  circles,  squares, 
etc.,  of  wood  may  be  put  into  more  permanent  form 
with  the  parquetry  papers.  These  are  circles,  squares, 
triangles,  etc.,  of  colored  papers,  the  unit  of  size  being 
the  inch.  There  are  1,000  in  a  package,  embracing 
the  six  colors — red,  orange,  yellow,  green,  blue  and 
violet,  with  two  shades  and  two  tints  of  each,  besides 
neutral  tones,  and  black  and  white. 

1.  Easter     Card.      Give    the    child     an    oblong 
piece  of  gray  cardboard,  six  inches  long,  and  some 
yellow  circles.    Let  him  paste  a  row  of  circles  for  dan- 
delion heads  and  then  chalk  in  the  green  stems.    Give 
to  father  for  an  Easter  card. 

Red  and  yellow  circles  may  be  cut  in  half  and 
so  arranged  as  to  suggest  tulips.  (See  page  122.) 

2.  Frieze.     Let    the    child    make    designs    for    a 
frieze  for  the  doll-house  parlor,  arranging  circles  and 
squares  successively  or  alternately  on  a  strip  of  paper. 
Or  he  can  make  a  design  for  the  doll-house  kitchen 
oilcloth  by  pasting  squares  or  circles  (one  square  or 
circle  surrounded  by  others)  in  a  square  unit. 


The  Kindergarten  Occupations        169 

An  inexpensive  paste  for  this  work  may  be  made 
of  gum  tragacanth.  Buy  five  cents'  worth  of  the  pow- 
dered gum.  Put  a  tablespoonful  into  an  empty  mucil- 
age bottle  and  fill  with  water.  In  a  few  moments  it 
will  dissolve  and  thicken.  Use  more  or  less,  accord- 
ing to  thickness  desired. 

Weaving  (Colored  kindergarten  weaving  mats,  weav- 
ing needle} 

This  is  one  of  the  most  popular  of  kindergarten 
occupations. 

Primitive  man  early  learned  to  interlace  the 
branches  of  trees  to  make  for  himself  a  shelter,  and 
to  weave  together  coarse  fibres  to  make  his  crude  gar- 
ments. In  course  of  ages  great  skill  was  acquired  in 
thus  using  all  kinds  of  flexible  materials;  artistic  bas- 
kets were  produced  of  raffia  and  reeds,  and  fine  gar- 
ments of  linen,  wool  and  cotton.  Beautiful  effects  in 
color  and  form  were  introduced,  the  designs  usually 
having  a  symbolic  meaning. 

Froebel  devised,  for  the  expression  of  this  natural 
tendency,  a  series  of  exercises  with  colored  paper, 
which  gave  practice  in  selection  of  color  harmonies, 
in  designing,  in  counting,  and  which  led  to  skill  and 
neatness  in  work. 

Loom-weaving  has  been  described  on  another 
page.  (90.)  In  many  kindergartens  it  now  en- 
tirely supersedes  the  paper-weaving,  which  we  will 
here  briefly  describe. 

i.  If  you  do  not  care  to  buy  the  regular  kinder- 
garten weaving  mats,  you  may  use  smooth  gray  or 
brown  wrapping  paper  cut  into  four-inch  squares.  In 
such  a  square  cut  tivo  slits  l/2  inch  apart  and  one  inch 
long.  From  some  pretty  paper  cut  a  strip  one  inch 
wide  and  two  inches  long  and  insert  in  the  slit  in  the 


1 70  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

mat,  pasting  the  ends  of  the  strip  to  the  under  side 
of  the  mat. 

2.  Cut  three  or  four  slits  in   similar  mats  and 
weave  into  them  one-inch  or  half-inch  strips,  using 
narrower  ones  as  the  child  gains  skill.     Weave  such 
a  strip  under  one  and  over  one;  then  weave  another, 
under  two  and  over  two,  etc. ;  thus  a  variety  of  effects 
may  be  produced  and  the  child  meanwhile  has  prac- 
tice incidentally  in  simple  counting.     Such  a  mat  may 
be  used  to  cover  a  glass  of  drinking  water  or  medicine 
glass. 

3.  A  larger  mat  may  be  made  of  pretty  paper 
cut  into  comparatively  fine  slits.     Paste  upon  this  mat 
a  square  of  smooth  paper  as  a  kind  of  lining;  fold 
cornerwise  and  paste  two  edges  together,  making  a 
kind  of  cornucopia. 

4.  Scent-Bag.     A    scent-bag    may    be    made    by 
putting   between   the   mat   and   the   lining   described 
above  a  thin  piece  of  cotton-batting,  sprinkled  with 
scent. 

5.  Oilcloth    or    Felt.     Instead    of    paper,    mats 
may  be   woven   of  plain   oilcloth   or   of   felt.     Have 
two  colors  of  each  material,  one  for  the  mat  and  one 
for  the  strips. 

On  a  5-inch  square  of  the  material  draw  four 
parallel  lines  one  inch  apart  and  one  inch  from  the 
top  and  bottom.  Then  using  these  as  guide  lines,  cut 
four  slits  and  weave  in  and  out  as  with  the  paper 
weaving.  Ribbon  may  be  used  for  the  woof  if  de- 
sired. Such  a  mat  may  be  used  for  a  lamp-mat  or 
for  a  flower-pot  mat. 

Among  the  reasons  for  discarding  the  paper- 
weaving  are  the  following :  The  colors  are  somewhat 
intense,  and  it  is  not  always  easy  to  secure  good  har- 


The  Kindergarten  Occupations        171 

monies;  the  care  necessary  to  avoid  tearing  the  deli- 
cate paper  and  soiling-  the  delicate  colors  is  often  a 
trial  to  highly-strung  children.  Therefore  they  should 
not  work  at  it  too  long  at  a  time.  A  weaving  needle 
comes  with  the  kindergarten  weaving  papers. 

Paper-Folding 

We  give  here  only  a  very  few  of  the  innumerable 
forms  which  may  be  made  by  folding  paper  accord- 
ing to  exact  directions.  Mother  may  conduct  such 
a  little  play  while  she  is  sewing  and  the  child  is  on 
the  floor  or  at  the  table.  But  directions  must  be 
exact  and  explicit.  After  once  having  told  what  to 
do  in  quiet,  distinct,  clear  language,  do  not  repeat. 
Train  the  child  to  hear  accurately  the  first  time. 

Papers  in  many  tones  may  be  obtained  from  the 
kindergarten  supply  stores,  but  any  exact  square  of 
white  paper  or  of  smooth  brown  wrapping  paper 
will  do. 

Place  the  simple  open  square  before  the  child, 
the  edge  directly  in  front  of  him.  Call  it  a  table- 
cloth and  ask  where  the  different  members  of  the 
family  sit.  If  able  to  wield  the  scissors,  let  him 
fringe  the  edge  all  around. 

1.  Book.     Give  a   second   square  and,   showing 
him  which  are  the  front  corners,  tell  him  to  take  hold 
of  these  and  fold  the  paper  over  so  that  the  front  edge 
is  just  on  a  line  with  the  back  edge.     Let  him  iron 
the  table  cloth  (crease  the  fold  with  his  thumb  nail) 
so  as  to  make  a  sharp  line  when  opened.    This  makes 
a  little  book  or  tent.     Ask  what  he  can  read  in  the 
book;  who  camps  out  in  the  tent;  etc. 

2.  Window.     Make  another  tent.     Keep  the  tent 
in   front  of  the  child   and  tell  him  to   open   it  and 
then  to  fold  the  left  side  over  so  that  the  left  edge 


172  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 


exactly  meets  the  right  edge.  Crease  and  open,  and 
the  result  is  a  window  with  four  panes.  Have  the 
child  tell  what  he  plays  he  can  see  through  it. 

3.  Tunnel.     Fold    a    square    once    through    the 
middle  as  before.     Open   and  notice  the   sharp  line 
made  by  the  crease.    Now  fold  the  front  edge  to  meet 
exactly  this  line.    Open  and  then  fold  the  back  edge 
to  meet  this  line.     Open  in  such  a  way  that  the  form 
when  standing  makes  a  little  tunnel.     Roll  a  marble 
under  it. 

4.  Barn.    Fold  a  square  into  sixteen  little  squares 
by    making    a    tunnel    in    one    direction    and    then 
folding  a  tunnel  in  the  other  direction,  so  that  the 
creases  cross  each  other  at  right  angles.     Open  out 
and  cut  from  the  left  edge  and  from  the  right  edge 
three  slits  along  the  horizontal  creases  to  the  first 
intersecting  vertical  crease.     (See  illustration.)     Now 


Paper-Folding. 

fold  No.  I  over  No.  2  so  that  one  little  square  exactly 
covers  the  other  and  paste  or  pin  together.  Do  the 
same  at  the  other  end.  This  draws  the  paper  into 
shape  of  gable  roof.  Place  remaining  flaps  so  that 
one  overlaps  the  other  a  trifle,  as  shown  in  the  illus- 
tration. Then  cut  a  door  in  the  side.  (See  illustra- 


The  Kindergarten  Occupations        173 

tion.)  This  can  be  made  of  a  large  sheet  of  strong 
paper  and  will  house  very  large  paper  animals. 

5.  Sailboat.  Place  a  square  of  paper  directly 
in  front  of  you.  Fold  the  front  edge  backward  to 
meet  exactly  the  back  edge  and  crease.  Open  and 
fold  the  left  edge  over  to  meet  exactly  the  right  edge 
and  crease.  Open. 

Turn  the  paper  over  so  that  the  wider  side  is 
uppermost,  and  place  so  that  a  corner  is  directly  in 
front  of  you.  Fold  the  paper  so  that  the  front  corner 
exactly  meets  the  back  corner  and  crease.  Open  and 
fold  so  that  the  left  corner  exactly  meets  the  right 
corner. 

You  now  have  a  square  crossed  by  two  diameters 
and  by  two  diagonals.  Number  the  corners  thus:  i,  2, 
3,  4,  and  the  center  o.  Take  the  corners  and  hold  in 
one  hand  so  that  i-o,  2-0,  3-0  and  4-0  are  back  to 
back.  Then  crease  in  that  position.  The  form  is  a 
square.  Lay  down  so  that  the  folded  corner  faces 
you.  Fold  the  loose  back  corner  down  to  meet  the  front 
corner.  Then  turn  over  and  again  fold  the  remain- 
ing back  corner  down  to  meet  the  front  corner,  and 
two  sails  become  visible.  Fold  back  one-half  of  the 
hull  to  make  a  base,  and  the  little  boat  will  stand  and 
move  if  breathed  upon.  It  can  be  made  water-tight 
by  dipping  in  melted  paraffine.  Melt  the  paraffine  by 
putting  it  in  a  double  boiler  with  boiling  water  be- 
neath. 

Cardboard  Modeling  (Cardboard,  knife,  pencil,  scis- 
sors') 

This  is  another  of  Froebel's  materials  which  is 
much  used  in  the  kindergarten.  The  regular  kinder- 
garten cardboard  comes  in  large  sheets  measured  off 
into  inches,  half  inches  and  quarter  inches  by  red  and 


174  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

blue  lines.  These  are  to  assist  in  the  accurate  cut- 
ting and  folding  of  the  stiff  paper.  The  tinted  Bristol 
board  obtainable  at  stationery  stores  is  also  much 
used. 

With  this  simple  material  older  children  acquire 
skill  of  both  hand  and  eye.  The  higher  school  grades 
are  now  using  it  to  a  great  extent  in  making  geomet- 
rical figures,  thus  gaining  practice  in  making  objects 
after  first  making  the  working  drawings  for  the  same. 
A  tinsmith  who  has  had  kindergarten  training  will 
find  himself  better  equipped  for  his  life  work  because 
of  this  early  experience  in  cutting  and  measuring. 

The  directions  here  given  assume  that  the  unruled 
cardboard  is  used. 

To  score  is  to  make  a  long  shallow  cut  or  scratch 
in  the  cardboard  with  a  knife,  so  that  it  will  bend 
easily.  We  give  a  few  simple  objects  in  the  order  of 
their  difficulty. 

1.  Book-Mark.     Draw   an   oblong    i  x  8   inches. 
Cut  it  out  and  punch  a  series  of  holes  down  the  mid- 
dle, one  inch  apart.    Run  a  bit  of  baby  ribbon  in  and 
out  and  thus  make  a  simple  book-mark. 

2.  Toy  Wash-Bench.     Draw  and  cut  an  oblong 
1x6  inches.     Draw  a  line  straight  across  this  one 
inch  from  each  end,  and  then  score  these  lines  lightly. 
Bend  and  you  have  a  wash-bench  for  doll's  house. 

3.  Sugar-Scoop.      Draw     and     cut     an     oblong 
2x4  inches.     Draw  a  line  lengthwise  through  the 
middle.     Score  this  line,  and  cut  along  the  score  one 
inch  from  each  end.     Score  again  from  each  end  at 
right   angles  to  the  previous   crease.      Bend   up  the 
scored  ends  and  the  side,  and  paste  the  flaps  together. 
This  may  be  used  for  the  toy  grocery  store. 

4.  Box.     Read    these    directions    through    once. 


The  Kindergarten  Occupations       175 

Then  begin  and  work  along  as  you  read  again,  and 
all  will  be  clear. 

Cut  out  a  square  measuring  4x4  inches.  Place 
squarely  before  you,  and  then  on  the  front  edge,  one 
inch  from  each  side,  make  a  dot.  On  the  back  edge, 
one  inch  from  each  side,  make  a  dot.  Unite  the  dots 
at  front  and  back  by  straight  lines.  This  gives  two 
vertical  lines. 

Now,  on  the  right  hand  edge,  one  inch  from 
each  end  make  a  dot,  and  do  the  same  on  the  left 
hand  edge.  Unite  these  dots  by  straight  lines,  which 
gives  two  horizontal  lines  crossing  the  ones  previously 
made  at  right  angles.  With  a  sharp  knife,  and  ruler 
to  keep  it  straight,  score  along  these  lines  so  that  they 
may  be  readily  bent. 

Now,  from  the  right  edge  cut  along  each  hori- 
zontal line  a  slit  one  inch  long.  From  the  left  edge 
cut  along  each  horizontal  line  a  slit  one  inch  long. 
These  cuts  will  give  four  flaps.  Bend  up  the  four 
oblong  sides  and  fold  each  flap  over  inside  the  box 
and  paste. 

A  little  experimentation  on  the  part  of  older  chil- 
dren will  show  how  to  elongate  one  side  so  as  to  make 
a  cover. 

Differences  in  the  proportions  of  the  original 
piece  of  cardboard  will  make  boxes  of  different  pro- 
portions. 

5.  Work- Box.  Draw  a  five-inch  pentagon.  Look 
up  in  a  geometry  to  find  the  rules  for  doing  this. 

Upon  each  side  as  a  base  erect  another  pentagon. 
Score  at  the  line  of  junction  and  bend  the  side  penta- 
gons till  the  edges  meet.  In  these  edges  punch  holes 
opposite  each  other,  and  through  these  tie  baby  ribbon 
to  hold  them  together. 


176  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

Clay  Modeling  (Potter's  clay,  oilcloth  or  small  smooth 

board,  curtain  pole} 

Clay  is  one  of  the  important  kindergarten  ma- 
terials, and  if  used  with  care  need  give  but  little  trou- 
ble. Buy  at  kindergarten  supply  store  or  art  shop. 

Take  a  yard  of  table  oilcloth  and  sew  tapes  to 
the  corners  so  long  that  the  oilcloth  may  be  tied  to  a 
table  and  thus  held  smooth  and  firm.  When  not  in 
use  keep  rolled  up  on  a  curtain-pole,  broom-handle 
or  dowel.  This  preserves  it  from  untimely  cracking. 
Upon  this  oilcloth  the  child  can  easily  work  with  the 
clay,  and  the  small  pieces  which  may  stick  to  it  are 
readily  wiped  off  with  a  damp  cloth.  If  preferred,  a 
small  board  about  a  foot  square  may  be  used  instead 
of  oilcloth.  The  child  soon  learns  not  to  scatter  the 
pieces.  It  is  well  for  him  to  wear  a  little  apron  when 
making  his  small  works  of  art.  When  finished  with 
the  clay,  let  him  remove  as  much  as  possible  from  the 
hands  as  a  rule,  what  remains  may  be  rubbed  away 
with  a  brisk  clapping  of  the  hands  or  is  washed  off 
very  readily. 

1.  If  his  first  impulse  is  to  pound  and  thump  the 
clay,  show  the  child  how  pretty  things  may  be  made 
by   gently   pressing   and    molding   the    clay   between 
thumb  and  fingers.     If  he  is  still  interested  in  pound- 
ing, show  him  how  to  make  a  sphere  by  rolling  the 
clay  between  the  palms,  and  then  by  striking  it  four 
times  hard  against  the  table  it  is  transformed  into  a 
rough  sort  of  cube  which  further  effort  will  improve. 

2.  If  he  inclines  to  make  a  number  of  balls,  show 
him  if  possible  one  of  the  cheap  clay  marbles,  and  tell 
him  to  make  some  like  it.  though  his  will  have  no 
glazing. 

3.  If  you  see  that  he  is  rolling  the  clay  into  long 


The  Kindergarten  Occupations        177 

lengths,  suggest  that  he  make  a  snake  or  links  of  a 
chain. 

4.  Older  children  may  be  shown  how  to  roll  it 
with  the  palm  into  long  slender  cylinders.     Then  coil 
these  round  and  round  spirally  upon  themselves  and 
so  build  up  a  jar,  as  certain  primitive  races  do.    Then 
smooth  it  outside  and  inside  until  well  shaped. 

5.  Bowls  and  crude  vases  are  easily  made,  and 
these  when  dried  may  be  painted  and  used  to  hold 
matches  or  pencils. 

6.  Sometimes,  to  stir  the  imagination,  break  off 
a  rough  piece  of  clay  and  ask  the  child  if  it  looks  like 
anything  to  him.     If  it  suggest  a  bird  or  fish  or  fruit, 
show  him  how  the  crude  form  may  be  made  more 
nearly  perfect. 

7.  Take  a  bit  of  clay  and  upon  it  press  another 
bit,  and  so  little  by  little  smooth  and  press  and  build 
up  a  plaque  y2   inch   high  and   four  inches  square. 
Upon  this  as  a  background,  build  up  in  the  same  way, 
little  by  little,  a  raised  leaf,  or  a  geometrical  figure, 
such  as  a  square  or  a  Maltese  cross.     If  a  leaf  is  made, 
copy  from  a  real  leaf. 

When  thus  interested,  let  the  older  children  read 
Longfellow's  beautiful  poem,  "Keramis,"  and  the  work 
of  the  potter  will  have  a  meaning  it  never  had  before. 

The  children  who  thus  make  crude  efforts  to 
express  the  beautiful  gain  in  power  little  by  little, 
and  will  have  added  capacity  to  appreciate  the  won- 
derful works  of  art  to  be  seen  in  every  gallery.  They 
will  gain  in  discrimination  as  to  what  is  really  beau- 
tiful, and  will  know  how  to  choose  those  decorations 
and  ornaments  which  will  make  their  homes  truly 
artistic. 

Clay  lends  itself  so  readily  to  the  slightest  turn 


178  Home  Occupations  for  Boys  and  Girls 

of  thought,  and  is  so  easily  employed  by  the  smallest 
pair  of  hands,  that  it  is  one  of  the  best  materials  to 
give  to  the  little  child.  He  soon  learns  to  tell  with  it 
what  he  may  be  able  to  say  in  no  other  way. 

When  ready  to  put  away,  break  into  small  pieces, 
put  the  pieces  together,  knead  a  little  till  made  into  a 
mass,  punch  a  few  holes  in  the  mass,  fill  these  with 
water,  put  into  a  stone  jar  and  cover  with  a  damp 
cloth.  Or  put  the  clay  into  a  cloth,  dampen,  and  then, 
twisting  the  four  corners  of  the  cloth  together,  drop 
the  mass  on  the  floor.  Do  this  several  times  and  it 
will  be  found  welded  together.  Then  put  into  the 
stone  jar.  Disinfect  clay  by  exposing  to  sunshine. 

Sand-Table  (Kitchen  table,  sazv,  boards,  nails,  sine) 
From  Germany  we  have  finally  learned  the  value 
of  the  sand-table  and  the  sand-pile  as  means  of  devel- 
opment to  the  child,  not  to  speak  of  their  virtues  as 
pure  givers  of  joy. 

Sand-tables  may  be  bought  at  kindergarten  stores, 
or  one  may  be  made  of  a  kitchen  table  by  sawing  off 
the  legs  to  the  size  which  brings  the  table  top  within 
reach  of  the  child.  Then  the  top  should  be  fenced 
in  with  boards,  from  three  to  six  inches  high,  to  keep 
the  sand  in.  It  is  a  good  plan  to  line  the  table  with 
zinc,  since  it  is  sometimes  desirable  to  have  the  sand 
pretty  wet,  although  it  generally  suffices  to  make  it 
just  damp  enough  to  mold  readily.  It  can  be  damp- 
ened with  a  sprinkling-can. 

1.  The  child  will  play  a  long  while  without  much 
suggestion.     A  little  pail  or  bottle  to  be  .filled  and 
emptied  and  refilled  will  furnish  material  for  his  em- 
bryonic experiments. 

2.  A  tiny  cast-iron  spade   (price  one  cent)   will 
add  materially  to  his  happiness. 


The  Kindergarten  Occupations        179 

3.  Shells  and  patty-pans  of  different  shapes  and 
convolutions  suggest  bakery  plays,  and  mother  must 
sample  the  baby's  cookery.     When  houses  and  forts 
and  churches  are  the  order  of  the  day,  paths  must  be 
laid  and  bordered  with  stones  and  shells ;  twigs  and 
elderberry  branches  make  tiny  trees  for  tiny  orchards ; 
and  a  little  pan  of  water  or  a  bit  of  mirror  makes  a 
wee  lake.    The  kindergarten  building  gifts  make  sub- 
stantial   structures,    bridges,    park-benches,    etc.     A 
winding  river  can  be  painted  with  blue  paint  on  the 
zinc.     When   the   child's   imagination   flags,   a  word 
from  the  mother  or  a  timely  story  will  start  a  new 
series  of  plays  next  time. 

4.  Older  children  will  enjoy  reproducing  in  the 
sand  the  hills  and  valleys  of  their  environment,  the 
roads,  woods  and  streams  which  they  know,  etc. 

5.  Tell  of  the  western  plant  which,  when  uprooted 
from  its  loose  hold  in  the  desert  sand,  is  sent  flying 
by  the  wind  over  the  sand,  and  wherever  it  touches 
makes  a  perfect  spiral.  Let  the  children  make  such 
spirals  with  a  coiled  piece  of  wire. 

6.  Having  noticed  the  impression  made  upon  the 
sand  by  the  patty-pans,  the  child  can  be  led  to  make 
designs  with  them  by  making  a  row  of  impressions 
equal   distances,   apart,   arranging  these   in   twos,   in 
threes,  etc. 


INDEX 

PAGE 

Abacus    17 

Acquiring  Skill  with  Brush  or  Pencil   74 

Aiming  Games   95,  96,  97 

Anagrams   102 

Apple-biting    C9ntest    132 

Apple  Candlestick    24 

Apple-seed  Penwiper   30 

Applied  Art  76 

Ash  Tray  67 

Autograph  Picture  105 

Badge  123 

Baking  Pan  Papers  57 

Balls    96,  156 

Barn,  Paper  Folding  172 

Beads,  Second  Gift  159 

Bean  Bag  Games  .' 95 

Bean  Bags,  To  Make  95 

Bed- Making   145 

Bedstead,  Dolls  87 

Bells   109,  139 

Berry  Baskets  or  Boxes   II 

Birchbark    42 

Biscuit,  Thimble  " 104 

Block  Furniture   85 

Blowing  Bubbles 51 

Blowing  Out  Candle  100 

Boat  22,  26,  36,  41 

Blue  Prints 52 

Bon-bon   Papers    58,  115 

Booklist  151 

Bookmark 58,  174 

Border  for  Sand-table   40 

Bottling  Shells    40 

Bottling  Stones  39 

Boxes   12,  15,  174 

Breastpin    71 

Bristol  Board   61 

181 


i 82  Index 

PAGl 

Brush,   Pencil  or   73 

Bubbles    51 

Burnt  Match  Safe   34 

Butter  Dishes    41 

Butterflies    105.  121 

Butterfly  Party 105 

Butter    Modeling    134 

Buttons   69 

Button-Box    15 

Button  Mold  Tops  70 

Button  Mold  Wheels   70 

Calendar   74,  109 

Candle,  Blowing  Out   100 

Candle  Design  55 

Candle  Making 137 

Candle   Sticks    24,  64,  138 

Canoe   43 

Cardboard    61 

Cardboard  Animals   63 

Cardboard  Modeling  173 

Cardboard  Sewing  165 

Carols  138 

Carrot  Top  45 

Celluloid   Butterflies    121 

Center  Piece,  Pumpkin   135 

Cereal  Boxes  32 

Chains 56,  115 

Chased  by  a  Goose 78 

Checkerboard  62 

Cherry  Stone  Game  99 

Chicken  Coop   13 

Chicken,  Easter 122 

Chicken,  Squash  Seed 29 

Child's  Library,  The  149 

Chinese  Kite  66 

Chinese  Toy  64 

Christmas   ". 136 

Cigar-Box  Bedstead    87 

Cigar-Box  Dollhouse    82 

Circle  Tag  92 

Classifying    39,  40,  48 

Clay   176 

Clay-pipe  Doll  80 


Index  183 

Clock,  Paper 86 

Clothespin  Doll  80 

Clothespin  Race   94 

Clover,  Four-leaf  48 

Collecting    39,  40,  48 

Color  Top  75 

Colors,  Matching   71 

Cork    36 

Cork  Doll   81 

Corn   18 

Corncobs    18 

Corncrib    18 

Cornhusks    18 

Cornstalks    135 

Counters  for  Games   28,  62,  69 

Countess  of  the  Huggermuggers   100 

Counting  Ball    96 

Cover  for  Medicine  Glass   166,  170 

Cradle,  Egg  Shell   25 

Cranberries    136 

Croquet  with  Peas  98 

Cross  Tag  93 

Cup  and  Ball 96 

Curtains  for  Dollhouse   87 

Cutlery,  Toy    36 

Cutting   Paper    54,  167 

Darning  Egg  44 

Decorated  Note-Paper   f  9 

Decoration   Day    )  .2.5 

Decorative   Cherries    114 

Decorative  Leaves   47 

Designs 21,28,  77 

Dinner  Souvenirs  120,  130,  134 

Dishes,  Tin-foil  35 

Dish-washing  143 

Distances,  Guessing  72 

Doll  Furniture  15,  37,  85 

Doll-Houses  82 

Doll  Park  89 

Dolls  80 

Donkey  Game   100 

Drawing   31,  72 

Drums    125 


184  Index 

PAGE 

Ducking  for  Apples  131 

Dusting  147 

Easter    120 

Easter  Card 122,  168 

Easter  Chicken  122 

East  Indian  Fan  43 

Edam  Cheese  Lantern  34 

Egg-shell  Boat  26 

Egg-shell  Cradle  25 

Egg-shell  Game  99 

Egg-shell  Garden  25 

Eggs,  Humpty  Dumpty 26 

Egg-shell,  To  Blow  25 

Egg-shells    25,26,  99 

Eighth  Gift  Plays   162 

Elevator,  Toy 71 

Epaulettes  56 

Experiments  with  Color   75 

Expression  with  Pencil  and  Brush  73 

Fairy  Tales,  Myths,  etc 151 

Fan   43,  63 

Feather,  Corn-husk  18 

Feather   Flowers    49 

Felt  Mats   170 

Fence 1 1,  19 

Festival  Occasions 107 

Festoons  47 

Firecracker  Designs    55 

Firecracker,   Imitation    124 

First  Gift  Balls  156 

Flags   119 

Flower- Pot  35 

Flower  Rack   37 

Flowers,  Feather   49 

Flowers,  Pressing 51 

Foot-ball,  Egg  99 

Fortune  Telling   131 

Fourth  of  July 124 

Frieze    48,  168 

Fringed  Bon-bon  Papers   58,  1 15 

Furniture   15,  20,  37.  85 


Index  185 

FACE 

Games  and  Plays   92,  157,  158,  161 

Gift  Card  166 

Gifts,  Kindergarten  155 

Go-Bang  Board 61 

Good  Luck  Pigs  109 

Gourds  44 

Grace  Hoops   97 

Grocery  Store  88 

Guess  Ball   96 

Guessing  Distances   72 

Hallowe'en    131 

Hammering  Soap  31 

Handkerchief  Box  42 

Hanging  Basket   15,  35,  44 

Hearts    no 

History  and  Biography  Books  152 

Home  Tasks    141 

Honey,  Weighing  103 

House,  Cob  19 

House,  Doll's   33,  82 

Household  Duties    141 

Humpty  Dumpty  Eggs  26 

Imitation  Water  31 

Independence  Day  124 

Indian  Head-dress  50 

Ironing    146 

Jack  O'Lantern  135 

Jackstones 39 

Japanese  Tag 93 

Key-Basket,  The 141 

Kindergarten  Materials — Gifts  155 

"         — Occupations    164 

Kite  60,  66 

Labor  Day  128 

Dinner    130 

"        ''     Parade    129 

Lacy  Valentine  in 

Lamp  Mats 170 


i 86  Index 

*xce 

Lamp,  Toy  86 

Lantern   33,  34,  1 39 

Toy  24 

Learning  to  Observe 73 

Leaves,  to  Dry  and  Press  47 

Lentils 163 

Library,  The  Child's  149 

Looms    go 

Man,  Prunes,  Raisins  27 

Masks 57 

Matching  Colors    71 

Matchsafe   34,  177 

Mats  18,  46,  170 

Medicine  Glass  Cover  166,  170 

Memorial  Day  123 

Merry-Go-Round,  Dolls'   89 

Midnight  Watching  109 

Mirror,  Toy  36 

Money,  Toy  . 36,  58 

Morning  Glories,  Pressed  51 

Moving  Van  32 

Music  Books   154 

Nature  Books 153 

Needle  Case  42 

Needles  71 

New  Year's  Bells  109 

"      Day    108 

Newspaper  Wrappers  57 

Numeral  Frame  17 

Nuts   22 

Occupations,  Kindergarten    164 

Oilcloth  Mats  170 

Oiled  Paper  87 

Omnibus  Swing 101 

Orange  Basket   24 

Paint-Box,  The  73 

Paint-Brush  Box   43 

Painting  from  Object  73 

"          Wagons  or  Houses  76 

Paper    54 


Index  187 

PAGE 

Paper  Chains   56,  115 

Paper  Cutting 54,  167 

Paper  Doll   81 

Paper  Folding  171 

Paper  Furniture   85 

Paper  Lanterns  1 18 

Paper  Mats  169 

Paper  Money  58 

Paper-Weight    40 

Papering  House   85 

Papers  for  Baking  Pans 57 

Park  for  Dolls 89 

Parquetry    168 

Parties,  Suggestions  for 103 

Paste    169 

Pasteboard  Doll  House 82 

Paste   Stick    14 

Path  Borders  or  Markers  39 

Pea  Furniture  164 

Peanut  Animals    23 

Doll    80 

Party    103 

Pea  Pod  Boat  16 

Peas    16 

Peaswork   164 

Pebbles   39 

Pegbpard    160 

Pencil  Box 43 

Pen  Tray 67 

Penwiper    42 

Perforating  or  Pricking 133,  165 

Piano  Scarf  41 

Picture  Books  153 

Picture  Frames  13,  44,  46 

Picture  Story 78 

Pictures  of  Seedling  74 

Pigments    75 

Pincushion    41 

Pin  Tray 41 

Place  or  Luncheon  Cards,  76,  108,  113,  119,  121,  127,  130,  133 
134,  136 

Plays  or  Games 92 

Plays  with  Gifts  161 

Plumes  for  Hat 55 


i 88  Index 

PAGE 

Poetry  Books  123,  153 

Pop-corn  Balls   22 

Pop-corn  Chains  or  Festoons  22,  139 

Portieres   21 

Post  Fence   19,  160 

Potato  Horse    17 

Race  94 

Pressed  Leaves  47 

Pressed  Morning  Glories  51 

Pricking   133,  165 

Prism  75 

Prunes   27 

Pulley,  Toy 71 

Pumpkin  Basket  or  Center  Piece 135 

Races   94 

Racing  Tag 93 

Raffia 45 

Rafts   19,  36 

Rag  Doll  82 

Raisins    27 

Ramekin  Dishes   41 

Reading   123,  133,  140,  177 

Red  Pepper  Lantern 24 

Reins 46 

Ring  Toss    97 

Road  Roller,  Spool  71 

Rockets,  Imitation  127 

Room  Decorations   132,  135 

Rope  and  Sandbag 101 

Rose-haw  Chains  or  Rosaries  51 

Rosettes    126 

Rug  Design  77 

Rugs  90 

Sailboat  23,  36,  173 

St.  Patrick's  Day    119 

Dinner   120 

St.  Valentine's  Day    no 

Dinner    112 

Salt  34 

Salt  Dishes   41 

Sand 178 

Sand  Table    178 


Index  i 89 

PAGE 

Saved  from  the  Scrap  Basket  53 

Scales,  Toy 88 

Scent  Bag 170 

Scissors,  Drawing 72 

Scrap  Books    68 

Screen,  Toy  or  Miniature  63,  122 

Second  Gift  Plays   157,  158 

Second  Gift  Beads  159 

Seedling,  Drawing  of  74 

Seed-markers  n 

Seeds    27 

Seventh  Gift,  Tablets  162 

Sewing  165 

Sewing  Basket,  The  69 

Shadow  Game  52 

Shamrock   ,  ..no 

Shells   40 

Shields  127 

Snowball   137 

Snowflakes   59 

Soap   31 

Soap  Box  Doll  House 84 

Soldiers  Caps,  etc 55 

Soldier-Flowers,  Milkweed  51 

Spiderweb  Party   104 

Valentine  in 

Spinning  Buttons   69,    70 

Sponge  Garden  120 

Spools 70 

Squash  Animals  17 

Squash  Seed  Chicken  29 

Stained  Glass  Windows  77 

Sticks,  Kindergarten    156,  162 

Stones  and  Pebbles  39 

Stove,  Toy 86 

Strawberry  Boxes   II 

Straws    51 

Stringing  21,  27,  51,  69,  136 

Sugar  Scoop 174 

Suggestions   for   Parties    103 

Sun  and  Shadow  52 

Sunday-School  Helps   154 

Surprise  Walnuts  23 

Sweeping   147 


190  Index 


PAGE 

Sweet  Potato  Animals   .................................  i? 

Sweet  Potato  Vine  .....................................  45 

Swimming  Float  .......................................  37 

Swing,   Omnibus    ......................................  101 

Table  Serving  .........................................  143 

Table  Setting  ..........................................  142 

Tablets,  Kindergarten   ..................................  162 


Tag 

ill 
et,  Sp 

per  .........................................     54 

Telephone  Toy,  for  Doll  House  .........................     87 


Tailless  Kite 

Target, 

Tearing 


Target,  Spool  ..........................................     70 

Paper 


Tents,  Paper   ..........................................  116 

Thanksgiving  ..........................................  133 

Thimble  Biscuit  Party  ..................................  104 

Threading  Needles    ....................................  72 

Tiling,  Doll  House   ....................................  85 

Tin  Cans  ..............................................  34 

Tin-  foil    ...............................................  35 

Top  .............................................  70,  75,  77 

Tower  Target,  Spool  ...................................  70 

Toy  Vegetables  ........................................  40 

Transparency  ..........................................  47 

Transparent  Papers  ....................................  75 

Tree-Boxes    .............................................  70 

Tunnel,  Paper  .........................................  172 

Turnip  Basket  .........................................  45 

Turtle  .................................................  27 

Umbrella,  Toy   .........................................  167 

Valentine  Party  Dinner  ................................  112 

Valentines  .............................................  no 

Vegetable  Animals  .....................................  17 

Vegetables   .............................................  45 

Toy    .......................................  40 

Wagon    .............................................  14,  32 

Walnut  Boats    .........................................  23 

Surprise  .......................................  23 

Washing    ..............................................  146 

Washbench,  Cardboard  .................................  174 

Washington's  Birthday  .................................  113 


Index  191 

PAGE 

Water-color  Cups    40 

Water,   Imitation    31 

Waxed  Leaves    47 

Weaving  go,  169 

Weighing  Honey   103 

Wheels    14,  32,     35 

Windows    77,    87 

Wishbone  Doll  80 

Work  Box   175 

Worsted  Mats  90 

Yarn  Doll  . .  .81 


A     000  037  051     o 


j 


